Form 485BPOS VARIABLE SEPARATE ACCOUN

Article

April 23, 2026 3:13 PM EDT

E-mail

File Nos. 333-185784
811-03859

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

Form N-4

REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

	Pre-Effective Amendment No.	[ ]
	Post-Effective Amendment No. 16	[X]

and/or

REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940

Amendment No. 16

[X]

Variable Separate Account

(Exact Name of Registered Separate Account)

American General Life Insurance Company

(Name of Insurance Company)

2727-A Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas 77019

(Address of Insurance Company’s Principal Executive Offices) (Zip Code)

(800) 871-2000

(Insurance Company’s Telephone Number, including Area Code)

Trina Sandoval, Esq.
American General Life Insurance Company
21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland Hills, California 91367

(Name and Address of Agent for Service)

Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: Continuous

It is proposed that this filing will become effective:

☐ immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b)

☒ on May 1, 2026 pursuant to paragraph (b)

☐ 60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1)

☐ on (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485 under the Securities Act of 1933 (“Securities Act”).

If appropriate, check the following box:

☐ This post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a previously filed post-effective amendment.

Check each box that appropriately characterizes the Registrant:

☐ New Registrant (as applicable, a Registered Separate Account or Insurance Company that has not filed a Securities Act registration statement or amendment thereto within 3 years preceding this filing)

☐ Emerging Growth Company (as defined by Rule 12b-2 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“Exchange Act”))

☐ If an Emerging Growth Company, indicate by check mark if the Registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 7(a)(2)(B) of Securities Acton (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485 under the Securities Act of 1933 (“Securities Act”).

☐ Insurance Company relying on Rule 12h-7 under the Exchange Act

☐ Smaller reporting company (as defined by Rule 12b-2 under the Exchange Act)

Title of Securities Being Registered: Units of interest in flexible premium deferred variable annuity contracts.

Polaris Choice IV

Prospectus

May 1, 2026

Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity Contract

issued by

American General Life Insurance Company

in all states except New York

in connection with

VARIABLE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

This variable annuity has several investment choices - Variable Portfolios (which are subaccounts of the separate account) and available Fixed Account options. Each Variable Portfolio invests exclusively in shares of one of the Underlying Funds listed in Appendix A to this prospectus. Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for additional information about the Variable Portfolios and the Fixed Account options.

This contract is no longer available for purchase by new contract Owners.

Please read this prospectus carefully and keep it for future reference. It contains important information about the variable annuity, including a description of all material features of the contract.

The contract is not a short-term investment and is not appropriate for investors who plan or need to take withdrawals or surrender the contract during the first four contract years due to application of Withdrawal Charges. Withdrawals could also result in taxes and tax penalties. The contract is a complex investment and involves risks, including potential loss of principal. You should speak with your financial representative about the contract's features, benefits, risks, and fees.
The Company's obligations under the contracts are subject to its financial strength and claims paying ability.

These securities have not been approved or disapproved by the SEC, nor any state securities commission, nor has the SEC passed upon the accuracy or adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available at www.Investor.gov.

Inquiries: If you have questions about your contract, call your financial representative or contact us at Annuity Service Center, P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570. Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862 and website (www.corebridgefinancial.com/annuities).

Please see ALLOCATION OF PURCHASE PAYMENTS in this prospectus for the address to which you must send Purchase Payments.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Glossary	3
OVERVIEW OF THE CONTRACT	4
Purpose of the Contract	4
Phases of the Contract	4
Contract Features	4
Important Information You Should Consider About the Contract	6
Fee Table	10
Contract Owner Transaction Expenses	10
Contract Owner Annual Expenses	10
Annual Underlying Fund Expenses	10
Examples	12
Principal Risks Of Investing In The Contract	13
Purchasing a Polaris Choice IV Variable Annuity	14
Allocation of Purchase Payments	15
Accumulation Units	17
Free Look	17
Exchange Offers	17
Investment Options	17
Variable Portfolios	17
Trusts	19
Substitution, Addition or Deletion of Variable Portfolios	19
Fixed Accounts	19
Dollar Cost Averaging Program	21
Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program	22
Transfers During the Accumulation Phase	22
Short-Term Trading Policies	23
Transfers During the Income Phase	25
Voting Rights	25
Access to your Money	25
Penalty-Free Withdrawal Amount	26
Systematic Withdrawal Program	27
Nursing Home Waiver	28
Benefits Available Under the Contract	28
Standard Benefits (No Additional Charge)	28
Optional Benefits no longer available for election	29
Optional Living Benefits	30
Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily	33
Additional important information applicable to all optional living benefits	41
Death Benefits	44
Beneficiary Continuation Programs	45
Death Benefit Defined Terms	47
Death Benefit Options	47
Standard Death Benefit	47
Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit	47
Spousal Continuation	48
Expenses	49
Base Contract Expenses	49
Withdrawal Charges	49
Underlying Fund Expenses	50
Contract Maintenance Fee	50
Transfer Fee	50
Optional Living Benefit Fees	50
Optional Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily Living Benefit Fee	51
Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Fee	51
Premium Tax	51
Income Taxes	51
Reduction or Elimination of Fees, Expenses and Additional Amounts Credited	51
Payments in connection with distribution of the contract	51
Annuity Income Options	53
The Income Phase	53
Annuity Income Options	53
Fixed or Variable Annuity Income Payments	54
Annuity Income Payments	54
Deferment of Payments	55

Taxes	55
Non-Qualified Contracts	55
Qualified Contracts	58
Tax Withholding and Reporting	62
Civil Unions and Domestic Partnerships	63
Our Taxes	63
Other Information	63
The Distributor	63
The Company	63
The Separate Account	63
The General Account	64
Financial Statements	64
Administration	64
Legal Proceedings	64
Registration Statements	65
Appendix A – Investment Options Available Under The Contract	A-1
Appendix B – State Contract Availability and/or Variability	B-1
Appendix C – Formula and Examples of calculations of the Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily Fee	C-1
Appendix D – Living Benefits for Contracts Issued Prior to AUGUST 22, 2016	D-1
Appendix E – Death Benefits Following Spousal Continuation	E-1
Appendix F – Death Benefits and Spousal Continuation Death Benefits for Contracts Issued Prior to January 23, 2012	F-1
Appendix G – Death Benefit Examples	G-1
Appendix H – OPTIONAL LIVING benefits examples	H-1

Glossary

We have capitalized some of the technical terms used in this prospectus. To help you understand these terms, we have defined them in this glossary.

Accumulation Phase - The period during which you invest money in your contract.

Accumulation Units - A measurement we use to calculate the value of the variable portion of your contract during the Accumulation Phase.

Annuitant - The person on whose life we base annuity income payments after you begin the Income Phase.

Annuity Date - The date you select on which annuity income payments begin.

Annuity Units - A measurement we use to calculate the amount of annuity income payments you receive from the variable portion of your contract during the Income Phase.

Beneficiary - The person you designate to receive any benefits under the contract if you or, in the case of a non-natural Owner, the Annuitant dies. If your contract is jointly owned, you and the joint Owner are each other’s primary Beneficiary.

Company - Refers to American General Life Insurance Company ("AGL"), the insurer that issues the contract. The term “we,” “us” and “our” are also used to identify the Company.

Continuation Contribution - An amount by which the death benefit that would have been paid to the spousal Beneficiary upon the death of the original Owner exceeds the contract value as of the Good Order date. We will contribute this amount, if any, to the contract value upon spousal continuation.

Continuing Spouse - Spouse of original contract Owner at the time of death who elects to continue the contract after the death of the original contract Owner.

Feeder Funds - Each of the following Feeder Funds invests exclusively in shares of a corresponding Master Fund: SA American Funds Global Growth, SA American Funds Growth, SA American Funds Growth-Income, SA American Funds Asset Allocation, and SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation Variable Portfolios.

Fixed Account - An account, if available, in which you may invest money and earn a fixed rate of return. Fixed Accounts are obligations of the General Account.

Fund-of-Funds - An Underlying Fund that pursues its investment goal by investing its assets in a combination of other Underlying Funds.

General Account - The Company’s account, which includes any amounts you have allocated to available Fixed Accounts and the Secure Value Account, including any interest credited thereon, and amounts owed under your contract for death benefits and/or Living Benefits which are in excess of portions of contract value allocated to the Variable Portfolios.

Good Order - Fully and accurately completed form(s) and/or instructions, including any necessary documentation, applicable to any given transaction or request received by us.

Income Phase - The period upon annuitization during which we make annuity income payments to you.

Insurable Interest - Evidence that the Owner(s), Annuitant(s) or Beneficiary(ies) will suffer a financial loss at the death of the life that triggers the death benefit. Generally, we consider an interest insurable if a familial relationship and/or an economic interest exists. A familial relationship generally includes those persons related by blood or by law. An economic interest exists when the Owner has a lawful and substantial economic interest in having the life, health or bodily safety of the insured life preserved.

Latest Annuity Date - The first NYSE business day of the month following your 95th birthday.

Market Close - The close of the New York Stock Exchange on business days, excluding holidays, usually at 1:00 p.m. Pacific Time.

Master Funds - Funds of the American Funds Insurance Series in which the Feeder Funds invest.

Non-Qualified (contract) - A contract purchased with after-tax dollars. In general, these contracts are not under any pension plan, specially sponsored program or individual retirement account (“IRA”).

NYSE - New York Stock Exchange.

Owner - The person or entity (if a non-natural Owner) with an interest or title to this contract. The term “you” or “your” are also used to identify the Owner.

Purchase Payments - The money you give us to buy and invest in the contract.

Purchase Payments Limit - $1,000,000

Qualified (contract) - A contract purchased with pretax dollars. These contracts are generally purchased under a pension plan, specially sponsored program or IRA.

Secure Value Account - A Fixed Account, available only with election of certain Living Benefits, to which we allocate a percentage of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution.

Separate Account - A segregated asset account maintained by the Company separately from the Company’s General Account. The Separate Account consists of Variable Portfolios or subaccounts, each investing in shares of the Underlying Funds.

Trusts - Collectively refers to the AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds), Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust, Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc., Seasons Series Trust and SunAmerica Series Trust.

Underlying Funds - The underlying investment portfolios of the Trusts in which the Variable Portfolios invest.

Variable Portfolio(s) - The variable investment options available under the contract. Each Variable Portfolio, which is a subaccount of the Separate Account, invests in shares of one of the Underlying Funds. Each Underlying Fund has its own investment objective.

OVERVIEW OF THE CONTRACT

Purpose of the Contract

The contract is designed to help you invest on a tax-deferred basis, meet long-term financial goals, and plan for your retirement. You can accumulate assets by investing in the contract’s investment options and then later convert those accumulated assets into a stream of guaranteed income payments from us. The contract includes certain death benefit options that may help financially protect your beneficiaries in the event of your death. Optional Living Benefits may also be available under the contract, which are designed to help you achieve your financial goals and protect against certain financial risks.

This contract may be appropriate for you if you have a long investment time horizon and the contract’s terms and conditions are consistent with your financial goals. It is not intended for people whose liquidity needs require early or frequent withdrawals or for people who intend to frequently trade in the contract’s Variable Portfolios.

Phases of the Contract

Like all deferred annuities, the contract has two phases: (1) the Accumulation Phase (for savings) and (2) the Income Phase (for income).

Accumulation Phase. During the Accumulation Phase, you invest the money under your contract in one or more available investment options to help you build assets on a tax-deferred basis. The available investment options may include:

•

Variable Portfolios. When you invest in a Variable Portfolio, you are indirectly investing in the Variable Portfolio’s Underlying Fund. The Underlying Funds have different investment objectives, strategies, and risks. You can gain or lose money if you invest in a Variable Portfolio.
Additional information about each Underlying Fund is provided in an appendix to this prospectus. Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.

•

Fixed Accounts. When you invest in a Fixed Account option, your principal is guaranteed and earns interest based on a rate set and guaranteed by the Company. Additional information about each Fixed Account is provided in an appendix to this prospectus. Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.

The amount of money you accumulate under your contract depends (in part) on the performance of the investment options you choose. You may transfer money between investment options during the Accumulation Phase, subject to certain restrictions and possible fees. Your accumulated

assets impact the value of your contract’s benefits during the Accumulation Phase, including the death benefit and any optional Living Benefits, as well as the amount available for withdrawal.

Income Phase. When you are ready to receive guaranteed income under the contract, you can switch to the Income Phase, at which time you will start to receive annuity income payments from us. This is also referred to as “annuitizing” your contract. You generally decide when to annuitize your contract, although there are restrictions on the earliest and latest times that your contract may be annuitized. If you do not annuitize or surrender your contract before the latest annuitization date, your contract will be automatically annuitized. Once your contract is annuitized, you will no longer be able to surrender, take withdrawals of contract value and all other features and benefits of your contract, including the death benefit, will terminate.

You can choose from the available annuity income options, which may provide income for life, for an available period of time, or a combination of both. You can also choose to receive payments on a variable or fixed basis, or some combination of both. If the payments are fixed, the dollar amount of each payment will not change. If the payments are variable, the dollar amounts for the payments will fluctuate.

There is no death benefit during the Income Phase. Annuity payments may be payable after death depending on the annuity income option that you selected. You cannot take withdrawals of contract value or surrender the contract during the Income Phase. If you own an optional Living Benefit at the time that you annuitize the contract, you may choose to take annuity income payments in accordance with that Living Benefit. Otherwise, your optional Living Benefit terminates at the beginning of the Income Phase.

Contract Features

Accessing Your Money. You may withdraw money from your contract at any time during the Accumulation Phase. If you make a withdrawal, you may have to pay a withdrawal charge and/or income taxes, including a tax penalty if you are younger than age 59½.

Withdrawals may negatively impact the value of your contract’s benefits, and may cause an optional Living Benefit to terminate.

Tax Treatment. You can transfer money between investment options without tax implications, and earnings (if any) on your investments are generally tax-deferred. Earnings are not taxed until they are distributed, which may occur when making a withdrawal, upon receiving an annuity payment, or upon payment of the death benefit.

Optional Living Benefits. You may be able to elect (or may have elected) one of the optional Living Benefits under

the contract for an additional fee. Certain Living Benefits are no longer available for election, and any Living Benefit that is available must be elected at the time that the contract is purchased. Each Living Benefit is designed to provide limited protection from unfavorable investment performance during the Accumulation Phase, and can also provide a guaranteed income stream that may last as long as you live.

Death Benefits. If you die during the Accumulation Phase, the Company pays a death benefit to your beneficiary or beneficiaries. The contract includes a standard death benefit equal to the greater of contract value or Net Purchase Payments at no additional charge. If you elect the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit for an additional fee, a greater amount may be payable upon death.

Additional Features and Services. Additional features and services under the contract are summarized below. There are no additional charges associated with these features and services unless otherwise noted. Not all features and services may be available under your contract.

•

Secure Value Account. Under certain optional Living Benefits, which include an additional charge, a certain percentage of your investment must be allocated to the Secure Value Account. As a Fixed Account option, amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account are guaranteed with respect to principal and a guaranteed rate of interest.

•

Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Fixed Accounts. If you invest in a DCA Fixed Account, interest is credited to amounts allocated to that DCA Fixed Account and your money is systematically transferred from the DCA Fixed Account to one or more investment options over a specified period of time. Automatic transfers do not count towards the number of free transfers per contract year.

•

Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Program. The DCA program allows you to systematically transfer a specified dollar amount or percentage of contract value from an investment option to one or more eligible investment options. Automatic transfers do not count towards the number of free transfers per contract year.

•

Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program. This program allows you to have your investments periodically rebalanced so that the resulting allocations are consistent with your current investment instructions. Automatic rebalances do not count towards the number of free transfers per contract year.

•

Systematic Withdrawal Program. This program allows you to receive periodic withdrawals from your contract on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis.

•

Automatic Payment Plan. This program allows you to make automatic subsequent Purchase Payments, once you have contributed at least the minimum initial Purchase Payment.

Important Information You Should Consider About the Contract

	FEES AND EXPENSES			Location in Prospectus
Are There Charges or Adjustments for Early Withdrawals?	Yes. If you withdraw money from your contract within 4 years following each Purchase Payment, you may be assessed a withdrawal charge of up to 8%, as a percentage of each Purchase Payment withdrawn. For example, if you were to withdraw $100,000 during a withdrawal charge period, you could be assessed a withdrawal charge of up to $8,000 if your maximum withdrawal charge is 8%. This loss will be greater if there are federal and state income taxes or tax-penalties. Withdrawal charges do not apply to certain withdrawals including the withdrawal up to the annual penalty-free withdrawal amount which equals 10% of your Purchase Payments not yet withdrawn.			Expenses – Withdrawal Charges
Are There Transaction Charges?	Yes, in addition to withdrawal charges, you may be charged for other transactions. You will be charged for each transfer after 15 transfers in any contract year during the Accumulation Phase. There may also be taxes on Purchase Payments.			Expenses
Are There Ongoing Fees and Expenses?	Yes. The table below describes the current fees and expenses of the contract that you may pay each year, depending on the investment options and optional benefits you choose. Please refer to your contract specifications page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.			Expenses
	Annual Fee	Minimum	Maximum
	Base Contract1	1.66%	1.66%
	Investment Options2 (Underlying Fund fees and expenses)	0.46%	1.85%
	Optional Benefits Available for an Additional Charge (For a single optional benefit, if elected)	0.25%3	2.70%4
	1 As a percentage of the value in the Separate Account (includes a percentage attributable to the contract maintenance fee). 2 As a percentage of Underlying Fund net assets. 3 As a percentage of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. 4 As a percentage of the Income Base used to calculate the guaranteed benefit. This represents the maximum charge for the most expensive optional benefit. Because your contract is customizable, the choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of owning your contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could pay each year, based on current charges. This estimate assumes that you do not take withdrawals from the contract, which could add withdrawal charges that substantially increase costs.
	Lowest Annual Cost: $1,861	Highest Annual Cost: $4,556
	Assumes: •Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation •Least expensive Underlying Fund fees and expenses •No optional benefits •No withdrawal charges •No additional Purchase Payments, transfers, or withdrawals	Assumes: •Investment of $100,000 •5% annual appreciation •Most expensive combination of optional benefits and Underlying Fund fees and expenses •No withdrawal charges •No additional Purchase Payments, transfers, or withdrawals

	RISKS	Location in Prospectus
Is There a Risk of Loss from Poor Performance?	Yes. You can lose money by investing in this contract, including possible loss of your principal investment.	Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract
Is this a Short-Term Investment?	No. •This contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash. As such, you should not use the contract as a short-term investment or savings vehicle. Charges may apply to withdrawals. Withdrawal charges could significantly reduce the value of your investment or the amount that you receive upon taking a withdrawal. Withdrawals may also reduce or terminate contract guarantees and may also be subject to state and federal income taxes and tax-penalties. •The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and optional Living Benefit guarantees mean that this contract is generally more beneficial to investors with a long investment time horizon.
What are the Risks Associated with the Investment Options?	•An investment in this contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance and can vary depending on the performance of the investment options available under the contract. •Each investment option (including each Fixed Account option) has its own unique risks. •You should review the available investment options before making an investment decision.
What are the Risks Related to the Insurance Company?	An investment in the contract is subject to the risks related to us, American General Life Insurance Company. Any obligations (including under a Fixed Account option), guarantees, and benefits of the contract are subject to our claims-paying ability. An Owner should look solely to our financial strength for our claims-paying ability. More information about the Company, including our financial strength ratings, may be obtained at https://investors.corebridgefinancial.com/financials/Ratings/default.aspx .

	RESTRICTIONS	Location in Prospectus
Are There Limits on the Investment Options?	Yes. Transfer Restrictions. •During the Accumulation Phase, you must transfer at least $100 per transfer between any of the Variable Portfolios and/or any available Fixed Accounts. If less than $100 remains in any Variable Portfolio or Fixed Account after a transfer, that amount must be transferred as well. Funds already in your contract cannot be transferred to the DCA Fixed Account, if available. A transfer request will be priced as of the day it is received before Market Close. If the transfer request is received after Market Close, the request will be priced as of the next NYSE business day. •During the Income Phase, only one transfer per month is permitted between the Variable Portfolios. No other transfers are allowed during the Income Phase. Transfers will be effected for the last NYSE business day of the month in which we receive your request for the transfer. You may not use the DCA Program or the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program during the Income Phase. •Your transfers between the Variable Portfolios are subject to policies designed to deter frequent and short-term trading. Investment Restrictions. If you elect an optional Living Benefit, not all investment options may be available and you must invest in accordance with the applicable investment requirements. You may be required to invest a certain percentage of your contract value in a certain investment option, including the Secure Value Account which is only available with certain option Living Benefits. We reserve the right to modify the investment requirements in the future. If you do not elect any optional benefit, or if the only optional benefit you elect is a death benefit, your contract is not subject to investment requirements. Availability of Variable Portfolios. We may, subject to any applicable law, make certain changes to the Variable Portfolios offered in your contract. We may offer new Variable Portfolios or stop offering existing Variable Portfolios. New Variable Portfolios may be made available to existing contract Owners, and Variable Portfolios may be closed to new or subsequent Purchase Payments, transfers or allocations. In addition, we may also liquidate the shares of any Variable Portfolio, substitute the shares of one Underlying Fund held by a Variable Portfolio for another and/or merge Variable Portfolios or cooperate in a merger of Underlying Funds. To the extent required by the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, we may be required to obtain SEC approval or your approval.	Investment Options
Are There Any Restrictions on Contract Benefits?	Yes. •There are restrictions and limitations relating to the benefits offered under the contract (e.g., death benefits, Living Benefits, DCA Fixed Account, DCA Program, Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program, Systematic Withdrawal Program, Automatic Payment Plan). •We reserve the right to modify or terminate the DCA Program, Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program, Systematic Withdrawal Program, and Automatic Payment Plan. •Withdrawals that exceed limits specified by the terms of a benefit may reduce the value of the benefit by an amount greater than the value withdrawn and could terminate the benefit.	Optional Living Benefits Death Benefits
	TAXES
What are the Contract’s Tax Implications?	•You should consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an investment in and payments received under the contract. •If you purchase the contract through a tax-qualified plan or individual retirement account (IRA), there is no additional tax benefit under the contract. •Earnings under your contract are taxed at ordinary income tax rates when withdrawn. You may have to pay a tax penalty if you take a withdrawal before age 59½.	Taxes

	CONFLICTS OF INTEREST	Location in Prospectus
How Are Investment Professionals Compensated?	Your financial representative may receive compensation for selling this contract to you in the form of commissions, additional cash compensation, and/or non-cash compensation. We may share the revenue we earn on this contract with your financial representative’s firm. Revenue sharing arrangements and commissions may provide selling firms and/or their registered representatives with an incentive to favor sales of our contracts over other variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to which a selling firm does not receive the same level of additional compensation. You should ask your financial representative about how they are compensated.	Payments in Connection with Distribution of the Contract
Should I Exchange My Contract?	Some financial representatives may have a financial incentive to offer you a new contract in place of the one you already own. You should exchange a contract you already own only if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new contract rather than continue to own your existing contract.

Fee Table

The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from an investment option or from the contract. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.

The first table describes the fees and expenses that you pay at the time you surrender the contract, make withdrawals from an investment option or from the contract, or make transfers between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted.

Contract Owner Transaction Expenses

Maximum Withdrawal Charges

(as a percentage of each Purchase Payment)1

Transfer Fee

(per transfer after the first 15 transfers in any

contract year)

$25

The following tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay each year during the time that you own the contract, not including Underlying Fund fees and expenses. If you chose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.

Contract Owner Annual Expenses

Contract Maintenance Fee2	$50
Base Contract Expense3 (deducted from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios)	1.65%

Optional Death Benefits

(deducted from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios)

Combination HV & Roll-Up Death Benefit Fee4	0.65%
Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Fee	0.25%

Optional Living Benefits

(calculated as a percentage of the Income Base)5

Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily Fee

Number of Covered Person	Maximum Annual Fee Rate6
For One Covered Person	2.20%
For Two Covered Persons	2.70%

MarketLock For Life Fee

Number of Covered Person	Annual Fee
For One Covered Person	0.70%
For Two Covered Persons	0.95%

Annual Underlying Fund Expenses

The following shows the minimum and maximum total operating expenses charged by the Underlying Funds of the Trusts, before any waivers or reimbursements, that you may pay periodically during the time that you own the contract. Expenses shown may change over time and may be higher or lower in the future. These amounts also include applicable fees and expenses if you choose to invest in certain Underlying Funds. A complete list of Underlying Funds available under the contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in Appendix A.

	Minimum	Maximum
Expenses deducted from Underlying Fund assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, if applicable, and other expenses.	0.46%	1.85%

Footnotes to the Fee Table:

1 Withdrawal Charge Schedule (as a percentage of each Purchase Payment withdrawn) declines over 4 years as follows:

Years Since Receipt:	1	2	3	4	5+
	8%	7%	6%	5%	0%

Your contract provides for a penalty-free withdrawal amount each year. Please see PENALTY-FREE WITHDRAWAL AMOUNT below.

2 The contract maintenance fee is assessed annually and may be waived if contract value is $75,000 or more.

3 If your Beneficiary elects to take the death benefit amount under the Extended Legacy Program, we will deduct an annual Base Contract Expenses of 1.15% which is deducted daily from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. Please see Extended Legacy Program under DEATH BENEFITS below.

4 The Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit is not available on contracts issued in Washington. You cannot elect the Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit if you elect the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit and/or a Living Benefit. Please see APPENDIX F for details regarding this death benefit.

5 The fee is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base which determines the basis of the guaranteed benefit. The annual fee is deducted from your contract value at the end of the first quarter following election and quarterly thereafter. For a complete description of how the Income Base is calculated, please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS below. If you purchased your contract prior to August 22, 2016, please see APPENDIX D for a description of the Living Benefit you may have elected.

6 The Initial Annual Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table below. Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index (“VIX®”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the maximums identified in the Fee Table and the minimums described below. Please see APPENDIX C — FORMULA AND EXAMPLES OF CALCULATIONS OF THE POLARIS INCOME PLUS, POLARIS INCOME BUILDER AND POLARIS INCOME PLUS DAILY FEE.

Number of Covered Persons	Minimum Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annualized Fee Rate Decrease or Increase Each Benefit Quarter*
One Covered Person	0.60%	±0.25%
Two Covered Persons	0.60%	±0.25%

The fee rate can increase or decrease no more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25%/ 4).

Examples

These examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the Variable Portfolios with the cost of investing in other annuity contracts that offer variable options. These costs include transaction expenses, annual contract expenses, and annual Underlying Fund expenses.

These examples assume all contract value is allocated to Variable Portfolios. Your costs could differ from those shown below if you invest in the Fixed Account options.

The expense examples below assume that you invest $100,000 in the Variable Portfolios for the time periods indicated; your investment has a 5% return each year; and you incur the maximum or minimum fees and expenses of the Underlying Funds as indicated in the examples.

The Maximum Expense Examples reflect the most expensive possible combination of charges (including additional charges for optional benefits). Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs at the end of the stated period would be the amounts set forth in the tables below.

Maximum Expense Examples

(assuming annual contract expenses of 1.90% including the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit, the optional Polaris Income Plus feature (for the first year calculated at the initial annual fee rate of 1.35% and at the maximum annual fee rate of 2.70% for the remaining years) and investment in an Underlying Fund with total expenses of 1.85%*)

(1)

If you surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:

1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
$12,413	$23,203	$29,625	$59,137

(2)

If you annuitize your contract at the end of the applicable time period:

1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
$4,413	$17,203	$29,625	$59,137

(3)

If you do not surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:

1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
$4,413	$17,203	$29,625	$59,137

Minimum Expense Examples

(assuming annual contract expenses of 1.65%, no election of optional features and investment in an Underlying Fund with total expenses of 0.46%**)

(1)

If you surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:

1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
$10,110	$12,580	$11,312	$24,391

(2)

If you annuitize your contract at the end of the applicable time period:

1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
$2,110	$6,580	$11,312	$24,391

(3)

If you do not surrender your contract at the end of the applicable time period:

1 year	3 years	5 years	10 years
$2,110	$6,580	$11,312	$24,391

Additional Expense Example Information

In addition to the stated assumptions, the Expense Examples also assume that no transfer fees were imposed. Although premium taxes may apply in certain states, they are not reflected in the Expense Examples.

If you elected other optional features, your expenses would be lower than those shown in the Maximum Expense Examples. The Maximum Expense Examples assume that the Income Base, which is used to calculate the Polaris Income Plus fee, equals contract value, that no withdrawals are taken during the stated period, there are two Covered Persons and that the annual maximum fee rate of 2.70% has been reached after the first year.

If you elected optional features, you do not pay fees for optional features once you begin the Income Phase (annuitize your contract); therefore, your expenses will be lower than those shown here. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS below.

The 1 year Maximum Expense Examples reflect the SunAmerica Series Trust 0.70% fee waiver.

The 1 year Minimum Expense Examples reflect the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust 0.03% fee waiver.

These examples should not be considered a representation of past or future expenses. Actual expenses may be greater or less than those shown.

Principal Risks Of Investing In The Contract

Market Risk. Variable annuities involve risks, including possible loss of principal. An investment in the Variable Portfolios available under the contract is subject to the risk of negative investment performance. You can lose money by investing in this contract, including loss of principal and/or prior earnings. Your losses could be significant. This contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. This contract is not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board, or any other agency.

Short-Term Investment Risk. This contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash. The benefits of tax deferral, long-term income, and Living Benefit protections mean that this contract is more beneficial to investors with a long investment time horizon.

Early Withdrawal Risk. This contract is not designed for short-term investing and may not be appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash. You should carefully consider the risks associated with withdrawals under the contract. Withdrawals may be subject to significant withdrawal charges.If you make a withdrawal prior to age 59½, there may be adverse tax consequences, including a 10% IRS penalty tax. A withdrawal may reduce the value of your standard and optional benefits. For instance, a withdrawal will reduce the value of the death benefit. In addition, a withdrawal could reduce the value of an optional Living Benefit by an amount greater than the amount withdrawn and could result in termination of the benefit. A total withdrawal (surrender) will result in the termination of your contract. We may defer payment of withdrawals from a Fixed Account option (including the Secure Value Account) for up to six months when permitted by law. If you make a withdrawal within the first 4 years, you may be assessed a Withdrawal Charge of up to 8% as a percentage of the payment amount withdrawn.

Variable Portfolio Risk. Amounts that you invest in the Variable Portfolios are subject to the risk of poor investment performance. You assume the investment risk. You can gain or lose money if you invest in these Variable Portfolios. Each Variable Portfolio’s performance depends on the performance of its Underlying Fund. Each Underlying Fund has its own investment risks, and you are exposed to the Underlying Fund’s investment risks when you invest in a Variable Portfolio. You are responsible for allocating Purchase Payments to the Variable Portfolios that are appropriate for you based on your own individual circumstances, investment goals, financial situation, and risk tolerance. You bear the risk of any decline in contract value resulting from the performance of the Variable Portfolio you have selected. In making your investment selections, you should investigate all information available to you including the Underlying Fund’s prospectus, statement of additional information and annual and semi-annual reports. We do not

provide investment advice, nor do we recommend or endorse any particular Underlying Fund.

Selection Risk. The optional benefits under the contract were designed for different financial goals and to protect against different financial risks. There is a risk that you may not choose, or may not have chosen, the benefit or benefits (if any) that are best suited for you based on your present or future needs and circumstances, and the benefits that are more suited for you (if any) may no longer be available. In addition, if you elected an optional benefit and do not use it, or if the contingencies upon which the benefit depend never occur, you will have paid for a benefit that you may not use or benefit from.

Investment Requirements Risk. If you elect an optional Living Benefit, you will be subject to investment requirements that limit the investment options that are available to you and limit your ability to take certain actions under the contract. These investment requirements are designed to reduce our risk that we will have to make payments to you from our own assets. In turn, they may also limit the potential growth of your contract value and the potential growth of your guaranteed benefits.

Availability of Variable Portfolios Risk. We may, subject to any applicable law, make certain changes to the Variable Portfolios offered in your contract. We may offer new Variable Portfolios or stop offering existing Variable Portfolios.

Variable Portfolios may be closed to new or subsequent Purchase Payments, transfers, or allocations. In addition, we may also liquidate shares of one Underlying Fund held by a Variable Portfolio for another and/or merge Variable Portfolios or cooperate in a merger of Underlying Funds. New Variable Portfolios may have different performance characteristics. There is no guarantee that a particular Variable Portfolio will always be available as an investment option under the contract.

Managed Volatility Fund Risk. Certain Underlying Funds, including some Underlying Funds that are available under certain optional Living Benefits’ investment requirements, utilize managed volatility strategies. These risk management techniques help us manage our financial risks associated with the contract’s guarantees, like living and death benefits, because they reduce the incidence of extreme outcomes including the probability of large gains or losses. However, these strategies can also limit your participation in rising equity markets, which may limit the potential growth of your contract value and the potential growth of your guaranteed benefits.

Purchase Payment Risk. Your ability to make subsequent Purchase Payments is subject to certain restrictions. We reserve the right to refuse any Purchase Payment(s), limit the amount of subsequent Purchase Payment(s) with advance notice based on age as shown below and election of optional benefit(s), and may require our prior approval before accepting Purchase Payments greater than the

Purchase Payments Limit as defined in the Glossary. There is no guarantee that you will always be permitted to make Purchase Payments.

Minimum Contract Value Risk. Where permitted by state law, we may terminate your contract if your contract value is less than $2,500 as a result of withdrawals and/or fees and charges. We will provide you with 60 days written notice that your contract is being terminated. At the end of the notice period, we will distribute the contract’s remaining value to you.

Financial Strength and Claims-Paying Ability Risk. All guarantees under the contract that are paid from our general account (including under any Fixed Account option) are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability.

Business Disruption. Our business is vulnerable to disruptions from natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, such as, but not limited to, hurricanes, windstorms, flooding, earthquakes, wildfires, solar storms, war or other military action, acts of terrorism, explosions and fires, pandemics (such as COVID-19) and other highly contagious diseases, mass torts, failure of telecommunications or other critical infrastructure and other catastrophes. A natural or man-made disaster or catastrophe may negatively affect the computer and other systems on which we rely, including service outages or other unavailability, may interfere with our ability to receive, pickup and process mail, to calculate Accumulation Unit Values (“AUVs”), process other contract-related transactions, or to otherwise provide our services, or may have other possible negative impacts. While we have developed and put in place what we believe to be appropriate business continuity and disaster recovery plans and procedures to mitigate operational risks and potential losses related to business disruptions resulting from natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, there can be no assurance that we, our agents, the Underlying Funds or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative impacts resulting from such disasters and catastrophes.

Cybersecurity Risk. We rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our variable product business activities. Because our variable product business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners and service providers, our business is vulnerable to physical disruptions and utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), cyber-attacks, and user errors or other disruptions that may compromise the confidentiality, integrity, or availability of such systems and data. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption, disclosure and destruction of sensitive business data, including personal information, maintained on our or our business partners’ or service providers’ systems, interference with our websites (such as via denial of service

attacks), other operational disruptions, and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. Such systems failures, cyber-attacks, or other disruptions affecting us, any third-party administrator, the Underlying Funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers, as well as our distribution partners, may adversely affect us and your contract value. For instance, systems failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website, our distribution partners, or with the Underlying Funds, impact our ability to calculate AUVs, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, including personal information, impede order processing, or subject us and/or our service providers, distribution partners and other intermediaries to regulatory fines and enforcement action, litigation risks and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Underlying Funds invest, which may cause the affected Underlying Funds to lose value. There may be an increased risk of cyber-attacks during periods of geo-political or military conflict. Further, the widespread development, implementation, and use of AI, machine learning, data analytics and similar tools that collect, aggregate and analyze data or inputs (collectively, “AI Tools”) may increase our exposure to, or exacerbate the risks of, cyber-attacks or other security incidents, particularly where such technologies are exploited by third parties to attempt to breach our or our business partners’ and service providers’ systems. Despite our implementation of policies and procedures, which we believe to be reasonable, that address physical, administrative and technical safeguards and controls and other preventative actions to protect our systems and sensitive business and customer information, including personal information, and reduce the risk of cyber-incidents, there can be no assurance that we or our distribution partners, the Underlying Funds or our business partners and service providers will avoid cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future that may affect your contract and/or personal information.

Purchasing a Polaris Choice IV
Variable Annuity

When you purchase a variable annuity, a contract exists between you and the Company. You are the Owner of the contract.

Maximum Issue Age

We will not issue a contract to anyone age 86 or older on the contract issue date.

Note: In general, we will not issue a Qualified contract to anyone who is age 72 or older, unless it is shown that the minimum distribution required by the IRS is being made. Please see TAXES.

Joint Ownership

A Non-Qualified contract may be jointly owned by a spouse or non-spouse. Joint owners possess an equal and undivided interest in the contract. The age of the older Owner is used to determine the availability of most age driven benefits.

The addition of a joint Owner after the contract has been issued is contingent upon prior review and approval by the Company.

We will not issue a Qualified contract with joint owners, in accordance with tax law.

Spouse

Your spouse (as determined for federal tax law purposes) may jointly own the contract. In certain states, domestic or civil union partners (“Domestic Partners”) qualify for treatment as, or are equal to, spouses under state law.

Non-Spouse

Domestic Partners should consult with their tax adviser and/or financial representative as, they may not be able to fully benefit from certain benefits and features of the contract such as the optional Living Benefit, if applicable Spousal Continuation of the death benefit.

Please see APPENDIX B — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for a list of states that require that benefits and features be made to domestic or civil union partners.

Non-Natural Ownership

A trust, corporation or other non-natural entity may only own this contract if such entity has sufficiently demonstrated an Insurable Interest in the Annuitant selected.

At its sole discretion, the Company reserves the right to decline to issue this contract to certain entities. We apply various considerations including but not limited to:

•

Estate planning,

•

Tax consequences, and

•

The propriety of this contract as an investment consistent with a non-natural Owner’s organizational documentation.

For more information on non-natural ownership, please see TAXES. You should consult with your tax and/or legal advisor in connection with non-natural ownership of this contract.

Assignment of the Contract/Change of Ownership

You may assign this contract before beginning the Income Phase. We will not be bound by any assignment until we receive and process your written request at our Annuity Service Center and you have received confirmation.

•

Your rights and those of any other person with rights under this contract will be subject to the assignment.

•

We are not responsible for the validity, tax or other legal consequences of any assignment.

•

An assignment will not affect any payments we may make or actions we may take before we receive notice of the assignment.

We reserve the right not to recognize any assignment, as determined in our sole discretion, if it changes the risk profile of the contract owner, if no Insurable Interest exists, or if not permitted by the Internal Revenue Code.

Please see TAXES for details on the tax consequences of an assignment. You should consult a qualified tax adviser before assigning the contract.

Termination of the Contract for Misstatement and/or Fraud

The Company reserves the right to terminate the contract at any time if it discovers a misstatement or fraudulent representation of any information provided in connection with the issuance or ongoing administration of the contract.

If we learn of a misstatement of age, we reserve the right to fully pursue our remedies including revocation of any age-driven benefits and/or termination of the contract. Please see APPENDIX B — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for specific information.

Allocation of Purchase Payments

In order to issue your contract, we must receive your initial Purchase Payment and all required paperwork in Good Order, including Purchase Payment allocation instructions.

An initial Purchase Payment is the money you give us to purchase a contract. Any additional money you give us to invest in the contract after purchase is a subsequent Purchase Payment.

Minimum Initial and Subsequent Purchase Payments

	Minimum Initial Purchase Payment (1)	Minimum Subsequent Purchase Payment	Minimum Automatic Subsequent Purchase Payment
Qualified(2)	$25,000	$500	$100
Non-Qualified(2)	$25,000	$500	$100

(1)

If you purchased your contract through certain broker-dealers, the minimum initial Purchase Payment may be higher than the amounts shown in this table.

(2)

These amounts depend upon whether a contract is Qualified or Non-Qualified for tax purposes. For further explanation, please see TAXES.

Purchase Payment Restrictions

We reserve the right to refuse any Purchase Payment. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments from contract Owners age 86 or older.

We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the first contract anniversary if you have elected

an optional Living Benefit feature. If you send a subsequent Purchase Payment after the first contract anniversary, the Purchase Payment will not be considered to be received by us and we will return the Purchase Payment. As a result, the Income Base of the Living Benefit may not be increased by adding Purchase Payments. We reserve the right to require Company approval prior to accepting Purchase Payments greater than the Purchase Payments Limit as defined in the Glossary.

•

For contracts owned by a non-natural Owner, we reserve the right to require prior Company approval to accept any Purchase Payment.

•

Purchase Payments that would cause total Purchase Payments in all contracts issued by AGL, The United States Life Insurance Company ("US Life") and/or The Variable Annuity Life Insurance Company ("VALIC") to the same Owner and/or Annuitant to exceed the Purchase Payments Limit may also be subject to Company pre-approval.

Submission of Purchase Payments

Purchase Payments will be priced when received at the Annuity Service Center. Delivery of Purchase Payments to any other address may result in a delay in crediting your contract until the Purchase Payment is received at the Annuity Service Center.

Regular Mail:

Purchase Payments sent by regular mail must be sent to the Premium Processing Center at the following address:

American General Life Insurance Company

Premium Processing Center

P.O. Box 100330

Pasadena, CA 91189-0330

Express Delivery:

Purchase Payments sent by overnight or express delivery must be sent to the Premium Processing Center at the following address:

American General Life Insurance Company

JPM Chase-AGL 100330

Premium Processing Center

2710 Media Center Drive

Building #6, Suite 120

Los Angeles, CA 90065-1750

Receipt of Purchase Payments:

Purchase Payments will be picked up at the mailing addresses noted above and forwarded to our Annuity Service

Center. Purchase Payments, however, are not considered received by us until received at our Annuity Service Center in Good Order.

We allocate your Purchase Payment to your contract as of the date such Purchase Payment is priced. Initial Purchase Payments received at the Annuity Service Center in Good Order before Market Close will be priced within two NYSE business days after it is received. Initial Purchase Payments received at the Annuity Service Center in Good Order after Market Close will be priced within two NYSE business days after the next NYSE business day.

If we do not have complete information necessary to issue your contract, we will contact you. If we do not receive the necessary information within five NYSE business days, we will obtain your permission to keep your money until we get the information necessary to issue the contract, or we will send your money back to whomever we received the funds.

Any subsequent Purchase Payment will be priced as of the day it is received by the Annuity Service Center in Good Order before Market Close. If the subsequent Purchase Payment is received at the Annuity Service Center in Good Order after Market Close, it will be priced as of the next NYSE business day.

We invest your subsequent Purchase Payments in the Variable Portfolios and available Fixed Accounts according to any allocation instructions that accompany the subsequent Purchase Payment. If we receive a Purchase Payment without allocation instructions, we will invest the Purchase Payment according to your allocation instructions on file.

Electronic Transmission:

We will accept initial and subsequent Purchase Payments by electronic transmission from certain broker-dealer firms.

Agent of Company:

We may have an agreement in place whereby your broker-dealer may be deemed our agent for receipt of your Purchase Payments. If a broker-dealer is deemed to be our agent, Purchase Payments will be priced as of the time they are received by the broker-dealer.

You assume any risk in market fluctuations if you submit your Purchase Payment directly to a broker-dealer that does not have such an agreement, should there be a delay in that broker-dealer delivering your Purchase Payment to us. Please check with your financial representative to determine if his/her broker-dealer has an agreement with the Company that deems the broker-dealer an agent of the Company.

Automatic Payment Plan:

Once you have contributed at least the minimum initial Purchase Payment, you can establish an Automatic Payment Plan that allows you to make subsequent Purchase Payments , if you have not elected a Living Benefit feature.

Accumulation Units

We credit your contract with Accumulation Units when you allocate a Purchase Payment to the Variable Portfolios. We determine the value of each Accumulation Unit at the close of every NYSE business day. The value of an Accumulation Unit goes up and down based on the performance of the Variable Portfolios and the fees and expenses under your contract.

The number of Accumulation Units you are credited is calculated the day we process your Purchase Payment. Please see ALLOCATION OF PURCHASE PAYMENTS.

The Accumulation Unit value is determined by multiplying the Accumulation Unit value for the preceding NYSE business day by a factor for the current NYSE business day.

The factor is determined by:

dividing the net asset value per share of the Underlying Fund at the end of the current NYSE business day, plus any dividend or capital gains per share declared on behalf of the Underlying Fund as of that day, by the net asset value per share of the Underlying Fund for the previous NYSE business day; and

multiplying it by one minus all applicable daily asset based charges.

We determine the number of Accumulation Units credited to your contract by dividing the Purchase Payment by the Accumulation Unit value for the specific Variable Portfolio.

Example:

We receive a $25,000 Purchase Payment from you on Wednesday. You allocate the money to Variable Portfolio A. We determine that the value of an Accumulation Unit for Variable Portfolio A is $11.10 at Market Close on Wednesday. We then divide $25,000 by $11.10 and credit your contract on Wednesday night with 2,252.2523 Accumulation Units for Variable Portfolio A.

Performance of the Variable Portfolios and the insurance charges under your contract affect Accumulation Unit values. These factors cause the value of your contract to go up and down.

Free Look

You may cancel your contract within ten days after receiving it. We call this a “free look.” Your state may require a longer free look period. Please check your contract or with your financial representative. To cancel, you must mail the contract along with your written free look request to our Annuity Service Center at P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570.

If you decide to cancel your contract during the free look period, generally we will refund to you the value of your contract on the day we receive your request in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center if received before Market

Close. If the free look request is received after Market Close, you will receive whatever your contract is worth as of the next NYSE business day. Certain states require us to return your Purchase Payments upon a free look request. Additionally, all contracts issued as an IRA require the full return of Purchase Payments upon a free look.

If your contract was issued either in a state requiring return of Purchase Payments or as an IRA, and you cancel your contract during the free look period, we return the greater of (1) your Purchase Payments; or (2) the value of your contract on the day we receive your request in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center. With respect to these contracts, we reserve the right to invest your money in a money market or similar portfolio during the free look period. If we place your money in a money market portfolio during the free look period, we will allocate your money according to your instructions at the end of the applicable free look period.

Exchange Offers

From time to time, we allow you to exchange an older variable annuity issued by the Company or one of its affiliates, for a newer product with different features and benefits issued by the Company or one of its affiliates. Such an exchange offer will be made in accordance with applicable federal securities laws and state insurance rules and regulations. We will provide the specific terms and conditions of any such exchange offer at the time the offer is made.

Investment Options

You may allocate purchase payments using one or a combination of the investment options and Fixed Accounts, as may be available under your contract:

•

Variable Portfolios

•

Fixed Accounts

•

Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account

•

Secure Value Account (optional Living Benefit only)

If you elect an optional Living Benefit, not all investment options may be available and you must allocate your Purchase Payments in accordance with the applicable investment requirements. Please see Investment Requirements For Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the specific investment requirements applicable to your Living Benefit.

Variable Portfolios

The Variable Portfolios available under the contract invest in the Underlying Funds of the Trusts. Contract value allocated to a Variable Portfolio will vary based on the investment

experience of the corresponding Underlying Fund in which the Variable Portfolio invests. There is a risk of loss of the entire amount invested.

Information regarding each Underlying Fund, including (i) its name, (ii) its type, (iii) its investment advisor and any sub-investment advisor, (iv) current expenses, and (v) performance is available in an appendix to this prospectus. See APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.

Each Underlying Fund has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the Underlying Fund. Read these prospectuses carefully before investing. Paper or electronic copies of the Underlying Fund prospectuses may be obtained by calling (855) 421-2692 or visiting our website at www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses.

You may also obtain information about the Underlying Funds by accessing the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission’s website at www.sec.gov.

All Variable Portfolios may not be available through the broker-dealer with which your financial representative is affiliated. Such portfolios are identified in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT. Please check with your financial representative for availability.

From time to time, certain Variable Portfolio names are changed. When we are notified of a name change, we will make changes so that the new name is properly shown. However, until we complete the changes, we may provide you with various forms, reports and confirmations that reflect a Variable Portfolio’s prior name.

Certain Underlying Funds offered under this contract have similar investment objectives to other Underlying Funds managed by the same advisor or subadvisor. The investment results of the Underlying Funds, however, may be higher or lower than such other Underlying Funds. We do not guarantee or make any representation that the investment results of any of the Underlying Funds will be comparable to the investment results of any other Underlying Fund managed by the same advisor or subadvisor.

You can gain or lose money if you invest in these Variable

Portfolios. You are responsible for allocating Purchase

Payments to the Variable Portfolios as appropriate for your

own individual circumstances, investment goals, financial

situation and risk tolerance. You should periodically review

your allocations and values to ensure they continue to suit

your needs. You bear the risk of any decline in contract

value resulting from the performance of the Variable

Portfolio you have selected. In making your investment

selections, you should investigate all information available

to you including the Underlying Fund’s prospectus,

statement of additional information and annual and

semi-annual reports.

We do not provide investment advice, nor do we

recommend or endorse any particular Underlying Fund.

Please consult your financial representative regarding which of these Variable Portfolios are appropriate for your risk tolerance.

You should read the prospectuses for the Trusts carefully for detailed information about the Underlying Funds, including each Underlying Fund’s investment objective and risk factors.

Selection of Underlying Funds

The Underlying Funds offered through this contract are selected by us and we may consider various factors in the selection process, including but not limited to: asset class coverage, the strength of the investment advisor’s or subadvisor’s reputation and tenure, brand recognition, the alignment of the investment objectives of an Underlying Fund with our hedging strategy, performance and the capability and qualification of each investment firm.

Another factor we may consider is whether the Underlying Fund or its service providers (i.e. the investment advisor and/or subadvisor(s)) or their affiliates will make payments to us or our affiliates in connection with certain administrative, marketing and support services, or whether the Underlying Fund’s service providers have affiliates that can provide marketing and distribution support for sales of the contract. Please see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACT below.

We review the Underlying Funds periodically and may make changes if we determine that an Underlying Fund no longer satisfies one or more of the selection criteria and/or if the Underlying Fund has not attracted significant allocations from contract Owners.

Fund-of-Funds

Certain Underlying Funds invest substantially all their assets in other Underlying Funds. These arrangements are referred to as Fund-of-Funds or Master-Feeder Funds, as described below. Expenses for a Fund-of-Funds may be higher than that for other funds because a Fund-of-Funds bears its own expenses and indirectly bears its proportionate share of expenses of the Underlying Funds. As a result, you

will pay higher fees and expenses under the Fund-of-Funds structure than if you invested directly in each of the Underlying Funds held in the Fund-of-Funds structure. This will reduce your investment return.

Master-Feeder Funds

Under the Master-Feeder Funds structure, the Feeder Funds do not buy individual securities directly. Rather, each Feeder Fund invests all of its investment assets in a corresponding Master Fund, which invests directly in individual securities.

Under the Master-Feeder structure, you will pay higher fees and expenses than if you invested in an Underlying Fund that invests directly in the same individual securities as the Master Fund. We offer other variable annuity contracts which include Variable Portfolios that invest directly in the Master Funds without investing through a Feeder Fund and they currently assess lower fees and expenses than the Master-Feeder Funds.

Each Feeder Fund may withdraw all its assets from a Master Fund if the Board of Directors (“Board”) of the Feeder Fund determines that it is in the best interest of the Feeder Fund and its shareholders to do so.

Volatility Control Funds

Certain Underlying Funds may employ risk management strategies that are intended to control the Underlying Funds’ overall volatility and to reduce the downside exposure of the Underlying Funds during significant market downturns. Conversely, these Variable Portfolios could limit the upside participation of these Underlying Funds in rising equity markets relative to other Underlying Funds.

These risk management techniques help us to manage our financial risks associated with guarantees, like the living and death benefits because this managed volatility strategy reduces the incidence of extreme outcomes including the probability of large gains or losses.

Trusts

We offer Underlying Funds of unaffiliated Trusts. The Trusts serve as the underlying investment vehicles for other variable annuity contracts issued by the Company as well as by other insurance companies.

Neither the Company nor the Trusts believe that offering shares of the Trusts in this manner disadvantages you. The Trusts are monitored for potential conflicts. The Trusts may have other Underlying Funds, in addition to those listed here, that are not available for investment under this contract.

We offer Underlying Funds of the following Trusts:

•

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) – Series II Shares

•

Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust – Class 2 Shares

•

Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust – Class Service Shares

•

Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. – Class VC Shares

•

Seasons Series Trust – Class 3 Shares

•

SunAmerica Series Trust – Class 3 Shares

Substitution, Addition or Deletion of Variable Portfolios

We may, subject to any applicable law, make certain changes to the Variable Portfolios offered in your contract. We may offer new Variable Portfolios or stop offering existing Variable Portfolios. New Variable Portfolios may be made available to existing contract Owners, and Variable Portfolios may be closed to new or subsequent Purchase Payments, transfers or allocations. In addition, we may also liquidate the shares of any Variable Portfolio, substitute the shares of one Underlying Fund held by a Variable Portfolio for another and/or merge Variable Portfolios or cooperate in a merger of Underlying Funds. To the extent required by the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, we may be required to obtain SEC approval or your approval.

Fixed Accounts

Fixed Accounts credit a fixed rate of interest that compounds daily for a specific period of time to an annual interest rate that we declare for that for that period of time. More information regarding the features of the Fixed Accounts including (i) its name, (ii) its term, and (iii) its minimum guaranteed interest rates, is available in an appendix to this prospectus. See APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.

Your contract may offer a Fixed Account for a guaranteed period. Your Fixed Account interest crediting rates are guaranteed for amounts allocated to each Fixed Account for up to 1 year. Thereafter, for Fixed Accounts other than Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account options (as described below), we will declare annual Fixed Account crediting rates each contract year, and this rate will never be lower than 1%. Factors that influence the declared Fixed Account renewal rate include, but are not limited to, the level of US treasury rates, credit spreads on corporate bonds and other fixed income instruments, company asset-liability matching strategies, the length of the contract withdrawal charge period and the number of years since your annuity contract was issued. You may obtain current interest rates by calling the Annuity Service Center or by speaking with your financial representative.

Please check with your financial representative regarding the availability of a Fixed Account. Allocations to the Fixed Account are obligations of the General Account. In reliance on certain exemptions and exclusions, interests in the General Account are not registered as securities under the Securities Act of 1933 and not registered as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940. However, the disclosures in the prospectus about the Fixed Accounts are subject to certain provisions of the federal

securities laws regarding the accuracy and completeness of disclosures. Please see GENERAL ACCOUNT below.

Minimum Guaranteed Interest Rate

We guarantee that the interest rate credited to amounts allocated to any Fixed Account guarantee periods will never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate specified in your contract. Once the rate is established, it will not change for the duration of the guarantee period. The minimum guaranteed interest rate can vary but is never lower than 1%. We determine which, if any, guarantee periods will be offered at any time in our sole discretion, unless state law requires us to do otherwise.

Interest Rate Categories

There are three categories of interest rates for money allocated to the Fixed Accounts. The applicable rate is guaranteed until the corresponding guarantee period expires. With each category of interest rate, your money may be credited a different rate as follows:

•

Initial Rate: The rate credited to any portion of the initial Purchase Payment allocated to a Fixed Account.

•

Current Rate: The rate credited to any portion of a subsequent Purchase Payment allocated to a Fixed Account.

•

Renewal Rate: The rate credited to money transferred from a Fixed Account or a Variable Portfolio into a Fixed Account and to money remaining in a Fixed Account after expiration of a guarantee period.

Fixed Account Restrictions

At any time we are crediting the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your contract, we reserve the right to restrict your ability to invest into the Fixed Accounts. All Fixed Accounts may not be available in your state. Please check with your financial representative regarding the availability of Fixed Accounts.

Secure Value Account

If you elect a Living Benefit, a certain percentage of your investment is automatically allocated to the Secure Value Account. The Secure Value Account is only available with the election of a Living Benefit and you may not reallocate your money from the Secure Value Account to another Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable Portfolios when the guarantee period ends. Please see APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT. Allocations to the Secure Value Account are obligations of the General Account. Please see GENERAL ACCOUNT below.

Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Accounts

Purchase Payments

You may invest initial and/or subsequent Purchase Payments in the dollar cost averaging (“DCA”) Fixed Accounts, if available. The minimum Purchase Payment amounts are as follows:

DCA Fixed Account	Minimum Purchase Payment
6-Month	$600
12-Month	$1,200
2-Year*	$2,400

2-Year DCA Fixed Account not available for contracts issued on or after October 1, 2013.

•

The DCA Fixed Accounts only accept initial and subsequent Purchase Payments because they are offered as “source” accounts exclusively to facilitate the DCA Program for a specified time period.

•

You may not make a transfer from a Variable Portfolio or available Fixed Account into a DCA Fixed Account. Please see DOLLAR COST AVERAGING PROGRAM below for more information.

•

Unless otherwise directed by you, any Purchase Payment less than the above minimum amounts will automatically be allocated to available investment options according to your current allocation instructions on file.

If your contract was issued on or after October 1, 2013, the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account is not available for investment. For contracts issued prior to October 1, 2013, without election of a Living Benefit, the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account will remain available for subsequent Purchase Payments on contracts issued initially with the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account. The minimum subsequent Purchase Payment that you must invest for the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account is $2,400.

DCA Interest Rate Crediting

DCA Fixed Accounts credit a fixed rate of interest and can only be elected to facilitate a DCA Program. Interest is credited to amounts allocated to the DCA Fixed Accounts while your money is transferred to available investment options over certain specified time frames. The interest rates applicable to the DCA Fixed Accounts may differ from those applicable to any other Fixed Account but will never be less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your contract. The minimum guaranteed interest rate can vary but is never lower than 1%. However, when using a DCA Fixed Account, the annual interest rate is paid on a declining balance as you systematically transfer your money to available investment options. Therefore, the actual effective yield will be less than the stated annual crediting rate. We reserve the right to change the availability of DCA Fixed Accounts offered, unless state law requires us to do otherwise.

Transfers/Withdrawals from Fixed Accounts Other than the Secure Value Account

This section applies to transfers and withdrawals from Fixed Accounts other than the Secure Value Account. Except for the Secure Value Account, there are no restrictions with respect to transferring out of or taking a withdrawal from a Fixed Account. If you make a transfer out of or a withdrawal from a Fixed Account prior to the end of a guarantee period, you will be credited the interest earned up to the time of transfer or withdrawal. When a guarantee period ends, you may leave your money in the same Fixed Account or you may reallocate your money to another Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable Portfolios. If you do not want to leave your money in the same Fixed Account, you must contact us within 30 days after the end of the guarantee period and provide us with new allocation instructions. We do not contact you. If you do not contact us, your money will remain in the same Fixed Account where it will earn interest at the renewal rate then in effect for that Fixed Account.

We reserve the right to defer payments for a withdrawal from a Fixed Account for up to six months.

If available through our Dollar Cost Averaging Program, you may systematically transfer interest earned in available Fixed Accounts into any of the Variable Portfolios on a monthly basis. Systematic transfers may be started, changed or terminated at any time by contacting our Annuity Service Center.

Check with your financial representative about the current availability of this service.

Transfers/Withdrawal from the Secure Value Account

This section applies to transfers and withdrawals from the Secure Value Account only. If you elect a Living Benefit, a certain percentage of your investment is automatically allocated to the Secure Value Account. Amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account may not be transferred to any Variable Portfolio or another Fixed Account. You may not transfer into or out of the Secure Value Account. You may not request the entire amount of any withdrawal to be deducted solely from the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces your contract value. On the date the Living Benefit is canceled, amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will be automatically transfers to a 1-year Fixed Account, if available. If the 1-Year Fixed Account is not available, amounts will be transferred to a money market or similar portfolio. From the day following the automated transfer from the Secure Value Account, you may transfer this amount to another available investment option under the contract during a period of 90 days. We do not contact you. If you do not contact us, your money will remain in the same investment option to which the automated transfer occurred.

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

Under the DCA Program, you systematically transfer a specified dollar amount or percentage of contract value from a Variable Portfolio, available Fixed Account or DCA Fixed Account (“source account”) to any available investment options (“target account”).

The DCA Program allows you to invest gradually in available investment options at no additional cost. The DCA Program is designed to lessen the impact of market fluctuations on your investment. However, the DCA Program can neither guarantee a profit nor protect your investment against a loss. When you elect the DCA Program, you are continuously investing in securities fluctuating at different price levels. You should consider your tolerance for investing through periods of fluctuating price levels.

Example of DCA Program

Assume that you want to move $750 each month from one Variable Portfolio to another Variable Portfolio over six months. You set up a DCA Program and purchase Accumulation Units at the following values:

Month	Accumulation Unit Value	Units Purchased
1	$7.50	100
2	$5.00	150
3	$10.00	75
4	$7.50	100
5	$5.00	150
6	$7.50	100

You paid an average price of only $6.67 per Accumulation Unit over six months, while the average market price actually was $7.08. By investing an equal amount of money each month, you automatically buy more Accumulation Units when the market price is low and fewer Accumulation Units when the market price is high. This example is for illustrative purposes only.

DCA Program Guidelines

•

Fixed Accounts are not available as target accounts for the DCA Program.

•

Transfers occur on a monthly periodic schedule.

•

The minimum transfer amount under the DCA Program is $100 per transaction, regardless of the source account.

•

Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA Program are not counted towards the number of free transfers per contract year.

Allocation of Subsequent Purchase Payments to DCA Program

If you have not elected an optional Living Benefit and you choose to allocate subsequent Purchase Payments to an active DCA Program with an available Fixed Account

serving as the source account, the rate applicable to that Fixed Account at the time we receive the subsequent Purchase Payment will apply. Further, we will begin transferring subsequent Purchase Payments into your target account allocations on the same day of the month as the initial active DCA Program. Therefore, you may not receive a full 30 days of interest prior to the first transfer to the target account(s). Please see DOLLAR COST AVERAGING FIXED ACCOUNTS above for more information.

Termination of DCA Program

You may terminate the DCA Program at any time. If you terminate the DCA Program and money remains in the DCA Fixed Account(s), we transfer the remaining money according to your current allocation instructions on file.

Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the DCA Program and transfer the remaining money according to the current allocation instructions on file.

Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program

Market fluctuations may cause the percentage of your investment in the Variable Portfolios to differ from your original allocations. Automatic Asset Rebalancing typically involves shifting portions of your money into and out of investment options so that the resulting allocations are consistent with your current investment instructions.

Under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program:

•

You may elect to have your investments in the Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts, if available, periodically rebalanced to return your allocations to preselected percentages for no additional charge.

•

At your request, rebalancing occurs on a quarterly, semiannual or annual basis.

•

Transfers resulting from your participation in this program are not counted against the number of free transfers per contract year.

Changes to Rebalancing Instructions

If you make a transfer, you must provide updated rebalancing instructions. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you make such transfer, we will change your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect the percentage allocations among the new Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts, if available, resulting from your transfer which will replace any previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”). You may change any applicable Default Rebalancing Instructions at any time by contacting the Annuity Service Center. If we cannot complete automatic rebalancing according to your current instructions due to Variable Portfolio changes, we reserve the right to allocate the applicable amounts that would have been transferred to the impacted Variable Portfolio(s) to a money market option available under the contract.

Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.

Mandatory Rebalancing with Election of a Living Benefit

If you elect an optional Living Benefit, we will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing. If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions would result in allocations inconsistent with the investment requirements, we will revert to the last compliant instructions on file and we will notify you of such reversion. If we cannot complete automatic rebalancing according to your current instructions due to Variable Portfolio changes (including closures, substitutions, or mergers), we reserve the right to allocate the applicable amounts that would have been transferred to the impacted Variable Portfolio(s) to a money market option available under the contract. In addition, any amount of your investment allocated to the Secure Value Account cannot be rebalanced. Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS below.

Automatic asset rebalancing will continue if it is a requirement of an optional Living Benefit that remains in effect pursuant to your Spousal Beneficiary’s election of Spousal Continuation.

We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program at any time and we will notify you 30 days prior to exercising that right. In the event of modification, we will administer the program according to the parameters of the modification. In the event of suspension or termination of the program, we will no longer administer the program and your investments will no longer be rebalanced.

Transfers During the Accumulation Phase

Subject to the Company’s rules, restrictions and policies (including short term trading policies) described below, you may transfer funds between the Variable Portfolios and/or any available Fixed Accounts.

•

Funds already in your contract cannot be transferred into the DCA Fixed Accounts, if available.

•

You must transfer at least $100 per transfer.

•

If less than $100 remains in any Variable Portfolio or Fixed Account after a transfer, that amount must be transferred as well.

Submitting Transfer Instructions

Your transfer instructions must be received via one of the methods and locations referenced below; otherwise they will not be considered received by us. Please see SHORT-TERM TRADING POLICIES below for more information.

Telephone:

(800) 445-7862

Internet:

www.corebridgefinancial.com/annuities

United States Postal Service (first-class mail):

Annuity Service Center

P.O. Box 15570

Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570

Facsimile:

(818) 615-1543

Telephone/Internet Authorization

We may accept transfers by telephone or the internet unless you tell us not to on your contract application. When receiving instructions over the telephone or the internet, we have procedures to provide reasonable assurance that the transactions executed are genuine. Thus, we are not responsible for any claim, loss or expense from any error resulting from instructions received over the telephone or the internet. If we fail to follow our procedures, we may be liable for any losses due to unauthorized or fraudulent instructions.

Transfer Fees

There is no charge for your first 15 transfers in any contract year. We charge for transfers in excess of 15 in any contract year. The fee is $25 for each transfer exceeding this limit. Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA or Automatic Asset Rebalancing Programs are not counted towards the number of free transfers per contract year.

Please see APPENDIX B - STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state-specific fees.

Accepting Transfer Requests

We cannot guarantee that we will be able to accept telephone, fax and/or internet transfer instructions at all times. Any telephone, fax or computer system, whether it is yours, your broker-dealer’s, or ours, can experience outages or delays for a variety of reasons and may prevent our processing of your transfer request. If telephone, fax and/or internet access is unavailable, you must make your transfer request in writing by U.S. Mail to our Annuity Service Center at the address above.

We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate telephone, fax and/or internet transfer privileges at any time and we will notify you prior to exercising the right of suspension.

Pricing Transfer Requests

Any transfer request will be priced as of the day it is received by us in Good Order if the request is received

before Market Close. If the transfer request is received after Market Close, the request will be priced as of the next NYSE business day.

Short-Term Trading Policies

This variable annuity contract is not designed to support frequent trading or trading strategies that seek to benefit from short-term price fluctuations or price inefficiencies in the Variable Portfolios of this product (“Short-Term Trading”) and we discourage Short-Term Trading as more fully described below.

Risks of Short-Term Trading

Short-Term Trading may create risks that may result in adverse effects on the investment return of the Underlying Fund in which a Variable Portfolio invests. Such risks may include, but are not limited to: (1) interference with the management and planned investment strategies of an Underlying Fund; (2) dilution of the interests in the Underlying Fund due to practices such as “arbitrage”; and/or (3) increased brokerage and administrative costs due to forced and unplanned fund turnover. These circumstances may reduce the value of the Variable Portfolio. In addition to negatively impacting the Owner, a reduction in contract value may also be harmful to Annuitants and/or Beneficiaries.

We have adopted the following administrative procedures to discourage Short-Term Trading which are summarized below.

Effective August 6, 2012, the Short-Term Trading policy applicable to your prospectus changed as follows:

Trading Policy Before Change	Trading Policy After Change
5th transfer in a 6-Month Rolling Period triggers the U.S. Mail method of Transfer	15th transfer in 12-Month Rolling Period triggers the U.S. Mail method of Transfer.

Standard U.S. Mail Policy

Under the Standard U.S. Mail Policy, all transfers must be submitted by U.S. Mail for 12-months. The 15th transfer in a 12-month look-back period (“12-Month Rolling Period”) triggers the Standard U.S. Mail Policy.

Transfer Requests under the U.S. Mail Policy

•

While the U.S. Mail Policy is in effect, we will not accept transfer requests sent by any other method except U.S. Mail.

•

Transfer requests required to be submitted by U.S. Mail can only be cancelled by a written request sent by U.S. Mail with the appropriate paperwork received prior to the execution of the transfer.

•

All transfers made on the same day prior to Market Close are considered one transfer request for purposes of applying the Short-Term Trading policy and calculating the number of free transfers.

•

Transfers resulting from your participation in the DCA or Automatic Asset Rebalancing Programs are not included for the purposes of determining the number of transfers before applying the Standard U.S. Mail Policy.

•

We apply the Standard U.S. Mail Policy uniformly and consistently to all contract Owners except for omnibus group contracts. See Omnibus Group Contracts below for more information.

Example

For example, if you made a transfer on August 21, 2026 and within the previous twelve months (from August 22, 2025 forward) you made 15 transfers including the August 21st transfer, then all transfers made for twelve months after August 21, 2026 must be submitted by U.S. Mail (from August 22, 2026 through August 21, 2027).

Accelerated U.S. Mail Policy

We may become aware of transfer patterns among the Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts which appear to be Short-Term Trading or otherwise detrimental to the Variable Portfolios but have not yet triggered the Standard U.S. Mail Policy described above. If such transfer activity comes to our attention, we may require you to adhere to our Standard U.S. Mail Policy prior to reaching the specified number of transfers.

Additional Short-Term Trading Restrictions

To the extent we become aware of Short-Term Trading activities which cannot be reasonably controlled solely by the Standard U.S. Mail Policy or the Accelerated U.S. Mail Policy, we reserve the right to evaluate, in our sole discretion, whether to:

impose further limits on the size, manner, number and/or frequency of transfers you can make;

impose minimum holding periods;

reject any Purchase Payment or transfer request;

terminate your transfer privileges; and/or

request that you surrender your contract.

We will notify you in writing if your transfer privileges are modified, suspended or terminated. In addition, we reserve the right not to accept or otherwise restrict transfers from a third party acting for you and not to accept pre-authorized transfer forms.

Enforcement Determination Factors

Some of the factors we may consider when determining whether to accelerate the Standard U.S. Mail Policy, reject transfers or impose other conditions on transfer privileges include:

•

the number of transfers made in a defined period;

•

the dollar amount of the transfer;

•

the total assets of the Variable Portfolio involved in the transfer and/or transfer requests that represent a significant portion of the total assets of the Variable Portfolio;

•

the investment objectives and/or asset classes of the particular Variable Portfolio involved in your transfers;

•

whether the transfer appears to be part of a pattern of transfers to take advantage of short-term market fluctuations or market inefficiencies;

•

the history of transfer activity in the contract or in other contracts we may offer; and/or

•

other activity, as determined by us, that creates an appearance, real or perceived, of Short-Term Trading or the possibility of Short-Term Trading.

Applicability to Third Party Trading Services

The Standard and Accelerated U.S. Mail Policies are applied uniformly and consistently to contract Owners utilizing third party trading services/strategies performing asset allocation services for a number of contract Owners at the same time. You should be aware that such third party trading services may engage in transfer activities that can also be detrimental to the Variable Portfolios, including trading relatively large groups of contracts simultaneously. These transfer activities may not be intended to take advantage of short-term price fluctuations or price inefficiencies. However, such activities can create the same or similar risks as Short-Term Trading and negatively impact the Variable Portfolios as described above.

Deterrence Limitations

Notwithstanding the administrative procedures above, there are limitations on the effectiveness of these procedures. Our ability to detect and/or deter Short-Term Trading is limited by operational systems and technological limitations, as well as our ability to predict strategies employed by contract Owners (or those acting on their behalf) to avoid detection. We cannot guarantee that we will detect and/or deter all Short-Term Trading and it is likely that some level of Short-Term Trading will occur before it is detected and steps are taken to deter it. To the extent that we are unable to detect and/or deter Short-Term Trading, the Variable Portfolios may be negatively impacted as described above.

Additionally, the Variable Portfolios may be harmed by transfer activity related to other insurance companies and/or retirement plans or other investors that invest in shares of the Underlying Fund. Moreover, our ability to deter Short-Term Trading may be limited by decisions by state regulatory bodies and court orders which we cannot predict.

You should be aware that the design of our administrative procedures involves inherently subjective decisions which we attempt to make in a fair and reasonable manner consistent with the interests of all Owners of this contract. We do not

enter into agreements with contract Owners whereby we permit or intentionally disregard Short-Term Trading.

Omnibus Group Contracts

Omnibus group contracts may invest in the same Underlying Funds available in your contract but on an aggregate, not individual basis. Thus, we have limited ability to detect Short-Term Trading in omnibus group contracts and the Standard U.S. Mail Policy does not apply to these contracts. Our inability to detect Short-Term Trading may negatively impact the Variable Portfolios as described above.

We reserve the right to modify the policies and procedures described in the TRANSFERS DURING THE ACCUMULATION PHASE section at any time. To the extent that we exercise this reservation of rights, we will do so uniformly and consistently unless we disclose otherwise.

Underlying Funds’ Short-Term Trading Policies

Please note that the Underlying Funds have their own policies and procedures (outlined in their respective prospectus) with respect to frequent purchases and redemptions of their respective shares which may be more or less restrictive than ours.

•

We reserve the right to enforce these Underlying Fund policies and procedures, including, but not limited to, the right to collect a redemption fee on shares of the Underlying Fund if imposed by such Underlying Fund’s Board of Trustees/Directors. As of the date of this prospectus, none of the Underlying Funds impose a redemption fee.

•

We also reserve the right to reject, with or without prior notice, any purchase, transfer or allocation into a Variable Portfolio if the corresponding Underlying Fund will not accept such purchase, transfer or allocation for any reason.

We are obligated to execute instructions from the Underlying Funds to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers in an Underlying Fund under certain circumstances.

Processing Omnibus Orders

Many investments in the Underlying Funds outside of these contracts are omnibus orders from intermediaries such as other separate accounts or retirement plans. If an Underlying Fund’s policies and procedures fail to successfully detect and discourage Short-Term Trading, there may be a negative impact to the Owners of the Underlying Fund. If an Underlying Fund believes that an omnibus order we submit may reflect transfer requests from Owners engaged in Short-Term Trading, the Underlying Fund may reject the entire omnibus order and delay or prevent us from implementing your transfer request.

Required Information Sharing

Under rules adopted by the SEC, we also have written agreements with the Underlying Funds that obligate us to, among other things, provide the Underlying Funds promptly upon request certain information about you (e.g., your social security number) and your trading activity.

Transfers During the Income Phase

During the Income Phase, only one transfer per month is permitted between the Variable Portfolios. No other transfers are allowed during the Income Phase. Transfers will be effected for the last NYSE business day of the month in which we receive your request for the transfer.

You may not use the DCA Program or the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program during the Income Phase.

Voting Rights

The Company is the legal owner of the Trusts’ shares. However, when an Underlying Fund solicits proxies in conjunction with a shareholder vote, we must obtain your instructions on how to vote those shares. We vote all of the shares we own in proportion to your instructions. This includes any shares we own on our own behalf. As a result of this proportionate voting, the vote of a small number of contract Owners can determine the outcome of a vote. Should we determine that we are no longer required to vote in the manner described above, we will vote the shares in our own right.

Access to your Money

You can access money in your contract in one of the following ways:

•

Partial Withdrawal;

•

Systematic Withdrawal;

•

Total Withdrawal (also known as surrender); or

•

Annuity Income Payment (during Income Phase).

Withdrawals made prior to age 59½ may result in a 10% IRS penalty tax. Certain Qualified plans restrict and/or prohibit your ability to withdraw money from your contract. Please see TAXES.

Minimum Withdrawal Amount and Minimum Contract Value

	Minimum Withdrawal Amount	Minimum Contract Value(1)
Partial Withdrawal	$1,000	$2,500(2)
Systematic Withdrawal	$100	$2,500(2)

(1)

The value left in any Variable Portfolio or available Fixed Account must be at least $100 after a withdrawal.

(2)

The total contract value must be at least $2,500 after a withdrawal.

Where permitted by state law, we may terminate your contract if your contract value is less than $2,500 as a

result of withdrawals and/or fees and charges. We will provide you with 60 days written notice that your contract is being terminated. At the end of the notice period, we will distribute the contract’s remaining value to you.

If you elected an optional Living Benefit, withdrawals taken under the parameters of the feature that reduce contract value below the minimum contract value will not terminate your contract. Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS below.

Penalty-Free Withdrawal Amount

Your contract provides for a penalty-free withdrawal amount each contract year during the applicable withdrawal period. The penalty-free withdrawal amount is the portion of your contract that we allow you to take out without being charged a withdrawal charge. The penalty-free withdrawal amount does not reduce the basis used to calculate future annual penalty-free withdrawals and withdrawal charges.

Your maximum annual penalty-free withdrawal

amount equals 10% of remaining Purchase Payments not

yet withdrawn each contract year, and still subject to

withdrawal charges.

If you elect an optional Living Benefit, please see

Penalty-Free Withdrawal Amount and the Living Benefit

on or after the Activation Date below.

Purchase Payments that are no longer subject to a withdrawal charge and not previously withdrawn may also be withdrawn penalty-free.

If, in any contract year, you choose to take less than the full penalty-free withdrawal amount, then you may not carry over the unused amount as an additional penalty-free withdrawal in subsequent years.

Assessment of Withdrawal Charges

We deduct a withdrawal charge applicable to any amount of a partial or total withdrawal in excess of your penalty-free withdrawal amount made before the end of the withdrawal charge period. Before purchasing this contract, you should consider the effect of withdrawal charges on your investment if you need to withdraw more than the annual penalty-free amount during the withdrawal charge period. You should fully discuss this decision with your financial representative.

The withdrawal charge percentage is determined by the number of years the Purchase Payment has been in the contract at the time of the withdrawal. Please see WITHDRAWAL CHARGES and EXPENSES.

When you make a partial withdrawal, we deduct it from any remaining annual penalty-free withdrawal amount first, next from remaining Purchase Payments on a first-in, first-out basis, and then from any remaining contract value. This means that you will access your Purchase Payments that are lower or no longer subject to withdrawal charges before

those Purchase Payments that are still subject to withdrawal charges or higher withdrawal charges.

Required Minimum Distributions

If you are taking required minimum distributions applicable to this contract only, we waive any withdrawal charges applicable to those withdrawals. Please see TAXES for details regarding required minimum distributions.

Annuity Income Payments

Any time after your second contract anniversary, you may receive annuity income payments for a specified period of time and at a frequency as elected by you. We will waive any applicable withdrawal charges upon processing of your request to annuitize the contract. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS.

If you request a total withdrawal (surrender) of your contract, we may also deduct any premium taxes, if applicable. If you fully surrender your contract, withdrawal charges will be assessed against the amount of Purchase Payments subject to withdrawal charges. This means that, if you surrender your contract while withdrawal charges still apply, any prior penalty-free withdrawal amounts taken in the current contract year are not subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges. Please see EXPENSES.

Calculating Withdrawal Charges

For the purpose of calculating the withdrawal charge if you request a total withdrawal of your contract, any prior penalty-free withdrawal amount, including a required minimum distribution, in the current contract year is not subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges.

Example:

For example, you make an initial Purchase Payment of $100,000. For purposes of this example we will assume a 0% growth rate over the life of the contract, no subsequent Purchase Payments and no election of optional features. In contract year 2, you take out your maximum penalty-free withdrawal of $10,000. After that penalty-free withdrawal your contract value is $90,000. In the 3rd contract year, you request a total withdrawal of your contract. We will apply the following calculation:

A–(B x C)=D, where:

A=
Your contract value at the time of your request for withdrawal ($90,000)

B=
The amount of your Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charge ($100,000)

C=
The withdrawal charge percentage applicable to the age of each Purchase Payment (assuming 6% is the applicable percentage) [B x C=$6,000]

D=
Your full contract value ($84,000) available for total withdrawal

Required Minimum Distributions

Annuity Income Payments

Processing Withdrawal Requests

A request to access money from your contract, as outlined above, must be submitted in writing and in Good Order to the Annuity Service Center at the following address. Withdrawals are processed effective the date they are deemed in Good Order and payments are made within 7 days. If you take a partial withdrawal, you can choose whether any applicable withdrawal charges are deducted from the amount withdrawn or from the contract value remaining after the amount withdrawn. If you fully surrender your contract value, we deduct any applicable withdrawal charges from the amount surrendered.

For withdrawals of $500,000 and more, you are required to include a signature guarantee issued by your broker-dealer which verifies the validity of your signature.

Annuity Service Center

P.O. Box 15570

Amarillo, TX 79105-5570

Any request for withdrawal will be priced as of the day it is received by us in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center, if the request is received before Market Close. If the request for withdrawal is received after Market Close, the request will be priced as of the next NYSE business day. Withdrawals are processed effective the date they are deemed in Good Order and payments are made within 7 days.

We may be required to suspend or postpone the payment of a withdrawal for any period of time when: (1) the NYSE is closed (other than a customary weekend and holiday closings); (2) trading with the NYSE is restricted; (3) an emergency exists such that disposal of or determination of the value of shares of the Variable Portfolios is not reasonably practicable; (4) the SEC, by order, so permits for the protection of contract Owners.

Additionally, we reserve the right to defer payments for a withdrawal from a Fixed Account for up to six months.

Partial, Systematic, and Required Minimum Distributions

Partial withdrawals, systematic withdrawals and required minimum distributions will be made proportionately from

each Variable Portfolio and the Fixed Account in which you are invested, unless you provide different instructions.

If you surrender your contract, we may deduct any premium taxes, if applicable. Please see EXPENSES.

Optional Living Benefit Withdrawals

Partial Withdrawals under an optional Living Benefit must be deducted proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and Secure Value Account in which you are invested. You cannot request withdrawals from one or more specific funds in which you are invested.

Total Withdrawals

We calculate withdrawal charges upon total withdrawal of the contract on the day after we receive your request in Good Order. Any prior penalty-free withdrawal amount in the current contract year is not subtracted from the total Purchase Payments still subject to withdrawal charges. We will return your contract value less any applicable fees and charges within 7 calendar days of the request.

Systematic Withdrawal Program

During the Accumulation Phase, you may elect to receive periodic withdrawals under the Systematic Withdrawal Program for no additional charge. Under the program, you may choose to take monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual payments from your contract. Electronic transfer of these periodic withdrawals to your bank account is available.

Please contact our Annuity Service Center which can provide the necessary enrollment forms. A withdrawal charge may apply if the amount of the periodic withdrawals in any year exceeds the penalty-free withdrawal amount permitted each year.

If you elect a Living Benefit and choose to receive periodic withdrawals under the Systematic Withdrawal Program, you must request withdrawals on the appropriate Living Benefit enrollment form. If we receive your request on another form, your request will not be processed. The Systematic Withdrawal Program for contracts with a Living Benefit is designed to provide withdrawal amounts within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. Any amounts taken above your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount while enrolled in the Systematic Withdrawal Program will eliminate the remaining systematic withdrawals within the same contract year and may permanently reduce future guaranteed withdrawal amounts. The systematic withdrawal program will be re-established in the following contract year after such withdrawals, and the annualized systematic withdrawals will be adjusted to account for the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. If you must take Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) from this contract and want to ensure that these withdrawals will not permanently reduce future guaranteed withdrawal amounts, your total distribution(s) during the current contract year must not exceed the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount under the Living

Benefit or the RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center. You may establish a systematic withdrawal program to take your RMD, which will ensure the amount taken does not exceed either the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount under the Living Benefit or RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center.

Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the Systematic Withdrawal Program.

We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the Systematic Withdrawal Program at any time and we will notify you prior to exercising that right.

Nursing Home Waiver

If you are confined to a nursing home for 60 days or longer, we may waive the withdrawal charge on partial or total withdrawals made while you are in a nursing home or within 90 days after you leave the nursing home.

•

You cannot use this waiver during the first 90 days after your contract is issued.

•

The confinement period for which you seek the waiver must begin after you purchase your contract.

•

We will only waive withdrawal charges on withdrawals paid directly to the contract owner, and not to a third party or other financial services company.

In order to use this waiver, you must submit the following documents to the Annuity Service Center:

a doctor’s note recommending admittance to a nursing home;

an admittance form which shows the type of facility you entered; and

the bill from the nursing home which shows that you met the 60 day confinement requirement.

Please see APPENDIX B — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state specific information regarding the availability of the Nursing Home Waiver.

Benefits Available Under the Contract

The following tables summarize information about the benefits available under the contract.

Standard Benefits (No Additional Charge)

Name of Benefit	Purpose	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
Standard Death Benefit	Provides a death benefit equal to the contract value or Net Purchase Payments	•Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Fixed Accounts	Interest is credited to amounts allocated to a DCA Fixed Account and your money is systematically transferred from the DCA Fixed Account to one or more investment options over a specified period of time	•Must be funded with an initial Purchase Payment, not transferred contract value •Minimum funding requirements apply •Only 6-month, 12-month, and 2-year periods may be available •Transfers may only occur on a monthly basis •Availability may be restricted based on date of contract issuance and election of optional benefits •Fixed Account options are not eligible to receive DCA transfers •The interest rates applicable to the DCA Fixed Accounts may differ from those applicable to any other Fixed Account but will never be less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your contract. •Contracts issued on or after October 1, 2013, the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account is not available for investment. •If available, the minimum subsequent Purchase Payment for the 2-Year DCA Fixed Account is $2,400.
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) Program	Allows you to have systematic transfers of a specified dollar amount or percentage of contract value from an investment option to one or more eligible investment options	•Transfers may only occur on a monthly basis and will not count towards the number of free transfers per contract year •Minimum per transfer is $100 regardless of source account •Fixed Account options are not eligible to receive DCA transfers •Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the DCA Program and transfer the remaining money according to the current allocation instructions on file
Automatic Asset Rebalancing	Allows you to have your investments periodically rebalanced to your pre-selected percentages	•Rebalancing may occur on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis •Updated rebalancing instructions must be provided upon making a non-automatic transfer, otherwise rebalancing instructions will be automatically updated •Upon notification of your death, we will terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program •If you elect an optional Living Benefit, we will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing

Standard Benefits (No Additional Charge) (continued)

Name of Benefit	Purpose	Brief Description of Restrictions / Limitations
Systematic Withdrawal Program	Allows you to receive periodic withdrawals from your contract	•Minimum withdrawal amount is $100 •Withdrawals may occur on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis •Participation in program may be restricted if optional Living Benefit elected
Automatic Payment Plan	Allows you to make automatic Purchase Payments	•Minimum requirements for the initial and subsequent Purchase Payments and age restrictions apply •May not be available with election of certain Living Benefit features

Optional Benefits no longer available for election

Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions/Limitations
Polaris Income Plus Daily Living Benefit	A guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit with frequent step-up opportunities	2.20% One Covered Person / 2.70% Two Covered Persons (as a percentage of Income Base)	•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit •Step-up opportunities change from daily to annually after first withdrawal •Investment requirements limit available investment options •Purchase Payments subject to additional restrictions •May not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th benefit anniversary •Certain events will automatically terminate the benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fee may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios only in certain states. Please see APPENDIX B – STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for specific states
Polaris Income Plus Living Benefit (Formerly SunAmerica Income Plus)	A guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit with Income Credits and step-up opportunities	2.20% One Covered Person / 2.70% Two Covered Persons (as a percentage of Income Base)	•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit •Income Credits unavailable after the 12th benefit anniversary •Investment requirements limit available investment options •Minimum Income Base not available on 12th benefit anniversary if withdrawal has been taken •Purchase Payments subject to additional restrictions •May not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th benefit anniversary •Certain events will automatically terminate the benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fee may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios only in certain states. Please see APPENDIX B – STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for specific states
Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit (Formerly SunAmerica Income Builder)	A guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit with Income Credits and step-up opportunities	2.20% One Covered Person / 2.70% Two Covered Persons (as a percentage of Income Base)	•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit •Income Credits not available in any benefit year withdrawals are taken and not available after 12th benefit anniversary •Investment requirements limit available investment options •Minimum Income Base not available if withdrawal taken before the 12th benefit anniversary •Purchase Payments subject to additional restrictions •May not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th benefit anniversary •Certain events will automatically terminate the benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fee may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios only in certain states. Please see APPENDIX B – STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for specific states

Optional Benefits no longer available for election (continued)

Name of Benefit	Purpose	Maximum Fee	Brief Description of Restrictions/Limitations
MarketLock For Life Living Benefit	A guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit with step-up opportunities	0.70% One Covered Person / 0.95% Two Covered Persons (as a percentage of Income Base)	•Excess withdrawals may significantly reduce or terminate the benefit •Ineligible for step-up period extension if any previous extension opportunity was not elected or age requirements are not satisfied •The fee and investment requirements may change if you elect a step-up period extension •Investment requirements limit available investment options •Purchase Payments subject to additional restrictions •May be cancelled by you on the 5th or 10th benefit anniversary or any benefit anniversary thereafter •Certain events will automatically terminate the benefit •May not be re-elected or reinstated after termination •Fee may be deducted pro rata from variable portfolios only in certain states. Please see APPENDIX B – STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for specific states
Maximum Anniversary Death Benefit	Provides a death benefit based on the greatest of contract value, net purchase payments, or highest contract value on an eligible contract anniversary	0.25% (as a percentage of average daily net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios)	•Death benefit calculated differently depending on whether an optional Living Benefit has been elected •Death benefit election cannot be changed •Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit
Optional Combination HV & Roll- Up Death Benefit (For contracts issued before January 23, 2012)	Provides a death benefit based on the greatest of contract value, highest contract value on an eligible contract anniversary, or net purchase payments with 5% accumulation	0.65% (as a percentage of average daily net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios)	•Fixed Account not available for investment •Death benefit election cannot be changed •Withdrawals may significantly reduce the benefit •Accumulation applies only to Purchase Payments made before the earliest of the 15th contract anniversary, your 80th birthday, or the date of death •Not available in New York and Washington

Optional Living Benefits

Overview of Living Benefits

The optional Living Benefits are designed to help you create a guaranteed income stream based on a series of withdrawals you may take from your contract that may last as long as you live, or as long as you and your spouse live. As long as you take these withdrawals within the parameters of the Living Benefit, you may receive a guaranteed income stream for life even if the entire contract value has been reduced to zero. Alternatively, you should know that you may also receive annuity income payments for life if you annuitize your contract. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS below.

Certain living benefits are no longer offered or have changed since first being offered. If your contract was issued prior to August 22, 2016, please see APPENDIX D for details regarding those benefits.

Below is a summary of the key features of the optional Living Benefits offered in your contract followed by a glossary of defined terms used to describe the Living Benefits.

Polaris Income Plus® offers guaranteed lifetime income plus the opportunity to increase income by locking in the

greater of either the contract’s Highest Anniversary Value, or an Income Base with an annual Income Credit. If you elect Polaris Income Plus, you may choose from Income Options 1, 2 or 3.

The annual 5.5% Income Credit is an amount we may add to the Income Base each year for the first 12 Benefit Years. The 5.5% Income Credit is reduced but not eliminated in any Benefit Year in which cumulative withdrawals are less than 5.5% of the Income Base and not greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount applicable to the income option you elected, thereby providing a guarantee that income can increase during the first 12 years even after starting withdrawals. After the first 12 years, only the Highest Anniversary Value increase may be available. In addition, if you do not take any withdrawals during the first 12 years, you will be eligible for the Minimum Income Base on the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary. The Minimum Income Base is equal to 200% of the first Benefit Year’s Purchase Payments.

Polaris Income Builder® offers guaranteed lifetime income and the opportunity to increase income by locking in the greater of either the contract’s Highest Anniversary Value, or an Income Base with an annual Income Credit.

The annual 5% Income Credit is an amount we may add to the Income Base each year for the first 12 Benefit Years.

The 5% Income Credit is only available in years when no withdrawals are taken. After the first 12 years, only the Highest Anniversary Value increase may be available. In addition, if you do not take any withdrawals during the first 12 years, you will be eligible for the Minimum Income Base on the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary. The Minimum Income Base is equal to 200% of the first Benefit Year’s Purchase Payments.

Polaris Income Plus Daily® offers guaranteed lifetime income plus the opportunity to increase income by locking in Step-up Values. Prior to the first withdrawal, Income Base step-ups, if any, occur on a daily basis. After the first withdrawal, Income Base step-ups, if any, occur only on Benefit Year Anniversaries, looking back at the prior Benefit Year’s Step-up Values. If you elect Polaris Income Plus Daily, you may choose from Income Options 1, 2, or 3.

General Information Applicable to All Living Benefits

You must invest in accordance with investment requirements outlined under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.

Living Benefits may not be appropriate if you plan to make ongoing Purchase Payments, such as with contributory IRA’s or other tax-qualified plans. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the first contract anniversary if you have elected a Living Benefit feature.

These optional Living Benefits are designed for individuals and their spouses who are seeking participation in the growth potential of the stock market and desire protection features that provide guaranteed lifetime/retirement income. The Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily Living Benefits are designed to provide the contract owner(s) lifetime income with the flexibility to start income at any time. The guaranteed rising income component available on Polaris Income Plus offers an additional benefit to those starting income soon after the contract is issued. Unlike Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily do not offer guaranteed rising income. For those deferring income, Polaris Income Builder combines the power of slightly higher withdrawal rates than some Polaris Income Plus Income Options and the annual Income Credit to grow the Income Base for a later income start date. Polaris Income Plus Daily allows the contract owner greater flexibility of investment options while providing the ability for the Income Base to step up more frequently to Step-up Values. If a contract is jointly owned by non-spousal joint Owners (which can include Domestic Partners) and either Owner dies, the surviving Owner must make an election in accordance with the death benefit provisions of the contract in compliance with the IRC, which terminates the Living Benefit. Please see DEATH BENEFITS below. Accordingly, the surviving Owner may not receive the full benefit of the Living Benefit.

Please note that not all of these Living Benefits may be available through the broker-dealer with which your financial representative is affiliated. Please check with your financial representative for availability and additional restrictions.

Any withdrawals taken may be subject to a 10% IRS tax penalty if you are under age 59½ at the time of the withdrawal. For information about how the Living Benefit is treated for income tax purposes, you should consult a qualified tax advisor concerning your particular circumstances. In addition, if you have a Qualified contract, tax law and the terms of the plan may restrict withdrawal amounts.

Effective January 15, 2016, if you have elected a Living Benefit and your contract was issued:

•

Prior to January 23, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the 5th contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

•

On January 23, 2012 to November 11, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 2nd contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

•

On or after November 12, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 1st contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

If you elected a living benefit feature, you may not establish an automatic subsequent purchase payment plan, and any current payment plan has been terminated.

Living Benefit Defined Terms

Anniversary Value

The contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary. The Continuation Contribution, if applicable, is included in the calculation of Anniversary Values. Please see SPOUSAL CONTINUATION below.

Benefit Effective Date

The date the Living Benefit is elected. The Benefit Effective Date is the same as the contract issue date.

Benefit Quarter

Each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.

Benefit Quarter Anniversary

The date following each consecutive 3 month period starting on the Benefit Effective Date. If the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary has no corresponding date, then the Benefit Quarter Anniversary will be deemed to be the following day.

For example, if a Benefit Quarter Anniversary is November 29, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would be February 29 of the following year; however, in a non-Leap Year, there is no corresponding date. Therefore, the next Benefit Quarter Anniversary would be March 1.

Benefit Year

Each consecutive one year period starting on the Benefit Effective Date.

Benefit Year Anniversary

The date on which each Benefit Year begins.

Contract Year

Each consecutive one year period starting on the contract issue date.

Covered Person(s)

The person, or persons, whose lifetime withdrawals are guaranteed under the Living Benefit.

Excess Withdrawal

Any withdrawal, or portion of a withdrawal, that is taken in a Benefit Year that exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the Required Minimum Distribution amount as calculated by the Annuity Service Center. An Excess Withdrawal will cause the Income Base, Income Credit Base, if applicable, and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount to be recalculated.

Highest Anniversary Value

For Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder only, the current Anniversary Value that is greater than (1) all previous Anniversary Values; and (2) Purchase Payments received prior to the first contract anniversary.

Income Base

The Income Base is used to determine the fee and the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year without reducing the Income Base and Income Credit Base, if applicable. The Income Base is also used to determine the amount paid each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the contract value is reduced to zero.

Income Credit

For Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder only, an amount that may be added to the Income Base during the Income Credit Period as shown in the following table:

Optional Living Benefit	Income Credit (as a percentage of the Income Credit Base)	Income Credit Availability
Polaris Income Plus	5.5%	Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is reduced in years withdrawals are taken
Polaris Income Builder	5%	Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is eliminated in years any withdrawal is taken
Polaris Income Plus Daily	Not available	Not available

Income Credit Base

For Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder only, the Income Credit Base is used solely as a basis for calculating the Income Credit during the Income Credit Period.

Income Credit Period

For Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder only, the period of time over which we calculate the Income Credit, which is the first 12 Benefit Years.

Investment Requirements

We will allocate a certain percentage of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, to the Secure Value Account. The remaining amount of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, must be allocated by you in accordance with the investment options outlined under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount

The maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero without reducing the Income Base and the Income Credit Base, if applicable.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage

The percentage used to determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount available for withdrawal each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero.

Minimum Income Base

For Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder only, the guaranteed minimum amount equal to 200% of the first Benefit Year’s Purchase Payments to which the Income Base will be increased on the 12th Benefit year Anniversary provided no withdrawals are taken before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary.

Protected Income Payment

The amount to be paid each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) after the contract value is reduced to zero but the Income Base is still greater than zero or if the Latest Annuity Date has been reached.

Protected Income Payment Percentage

The percentage used to determine the Protected Income Payment.

Step-up Value

For Polaris Income Plus Daily only, a value used to determine the Income Base that is equal to the contract value on any day if it is greater than the Income Base on that day. This value is determined daily.

Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily

How do Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder work?

Both Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder lock in the greater of two values to determine the Income Base. The Income Base is the basis for the Covered Person(s)’ guaranteed lifetime benefit which must be taken in a series of withdrawals. The Income Base is initially equal to the first Purchase Payment. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the first contract anniversary. While the Income Base is greater than zero, the Income Base is automatically locked in on each Benefit Year Anniversary, to the greater of (1) the Highest Anniversary Value, or (2) the current Income Base increased by any available Income Credit.

There is an additional guarantee if you do not take any withdrawals before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base will be at least 200% of your first Benefit Year’s Purchase Payments (“Minimum Income Base”). Please see “How can the Income Base and Income Credit Base be increased?” below.

How does Polaris Income Plus Daily work?

Unlike Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder, Polaris Income Plus Daily offers neither Income Credits nor a Minimum Income Base. Instead, Polaris Income Plus Daily’s Income Base is increased by locking in Step-up Values. The Income Base is the basis for the Covered Person(s)’ guaranteed lifetime benefit which must be taken in a series of withdrawals. The Income Base is initially equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by subsequent Purchase Payments. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments after the first contract anniversary. Until a withdrawal has been taken, the Income Base is increased to the Step-up Value immediately. After the first withdrawal, while both the Income Base and the contract values are greater than zero, the Income Base may only be increased on the Benefit Year Anniversary dates, looking back at the prior Benefit Year’s Step-up Values. Please see “How can the Income Base be increased for Polaris Income Plus Daily?” below.

What determines the amount I can receive each year?

The amount that you receive depends on which Living Benefit you have elected, the income option you have elected, whether there are one or two Covered Person(s), the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of the first withdrawal and whether your contract value is greater than or equal to zero. For Polaris Plus Income Daily, the amount you receive also differs depending on when you take your first withdrawal. You must choose a feature and income option, if applicable, at the time you purchase your contract and your election may not be changed thereafter. Please see the table below for the income options available to you. If

you purchased your contract through certain broker-dealers, all income options may not be available to you.

While the contract value is greater than zero, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to calculate the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount that you may withdraw each Benefit Year without decreasing your Income Base and Income Credit Base, if applicable. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage differs depending on the feature elected and whether there are one or two Covered Person(s), the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of first withdrawal and the income option elected.

If your contract value has been reduced to zero or the Latest Annuity Date is reached, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to calculate the Protected Income Payment that you will receive each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s). The Protected Income Payment Percentage differs depending on (1) the income option you elected, (2) whether there are one or two Covered Person(s), (3) the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of the first withdrawal, (4) for those taking withdrawals before age 65, if applicable under the income option elected, whether the Income Base steps up due to favorable market conditions after the Covered Person(s)’ 65th birthday and, for Polaris Plus Income Daily only, (5) when you take your first withdrawal. Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?” and “What happens to my Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?” below.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage Table

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

POLARIS INCOME PLUS

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1)	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 2	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 3
One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59)	4.0% / 3.0%(2)	4.0% / 3.0%(2)	3.25% / 3.25%
One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64)	5.0% / 3.0%(2)	5.0% / 3.0%(2)	3.75% / 3.75%
One Covered Person (Age 65 - 71)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	5.0% / 5.0%
One Covered Person (Age 72 and Older)	6.5% / 4.0%	7.5% / 3.0%	5.25% / 5.25%
Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59)	3.5% / 3.0%(3)	3.5% / 3.0%(3)	3.0% / 3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64)	4.5% / 3.0%(3)	4.5% / 3.0%(3)	3.5% / 3.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 71)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%	4.5% / 4.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 72 and Older)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	4.75% / 4.75%

POLARIS INCOME BUILDER

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1)	Polaris Income Builder
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.40% / 5.40%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	4.90% / 4.90%

POLARIS INCOME PLUS DAILY

If no withdrawals are taken prior to the 5th contract anniversary or if the first withdrawal is taken when the Covered Person is age 68 or older:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1)	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 2	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 3
One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59)	4.0% / 3.0%(2)	4.0% / 3.0%(2)	3.25% / 3.25%
One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64)	5.0% / 3.0%(2)	5.0% / 3.0%(2)	3.75% / 3.75%
One Covered Person (Age 65 - 71)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	5.0% / 5.0%
One Covered Person (Age 72 and Older)	6.5% / 4.0%	7.5% / 3.0%	5.25% / 5.25%
Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59)	3.5% / 3.0%(3)	3.5% / 3.0%(3)	3.0% / 3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64)	4.5% / 3.0%(3)	4.5% / 3.0%(3)	3.5% / 3.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 71)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%	4.5% / 4.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 72 and Older)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	4.75% / 4.75%

If the withdrawal is taken prior to the 5th contract anniversary and the Covered Person is younger than age 68:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1)	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 2	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 3
One Covered Person (Age 45 - 59)	3.5% / 2.5%(4)	3.5% / 2.5%(4)	2.75% / 2.75%
One Covered Person (Age 60 - 64)	4.5% / 2.5%(4)	4.5% / 2.5%(4)	3.25% / 3.25%
One Covered Person (Age 65 - 67)	5.5% / 3.5%	6.5% / 2.5%	4.5% / 4.5%
One Covered Person (Age 68 - 71)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	5.0% / 5.0%
One Covered Person (Age 72 and Older)	6.5% / 4.0%	7.5% / 3.0%	5.25% / 5.25%
Two Covered Persons (Age 45 - 59)	3.0% / 2.5%(5)	3.0% / 2.5%(5)	2.5% / 2.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 60 - 64)	4.0% / 2.5%(5)	4.0% / 2.5%(5)	3.0% / 3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 - 67)	5.0% / 3.5%	6.0% / 2.5%	4.0% / 4.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 68 - 71)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%	4.5% / 4.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 72 and Older)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	4.75% / 4.75%

(1) If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered Person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age at first withdrawal is based on the age of the younger of the Two Covered Persons.

(2) If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new Highest Anniversary Value on or after the Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

(3) If Two Covered Persons are elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new Highest Anniversary Value on or after the younger Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

(4) If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 3.5% if the Income Base is increased to a Step-Up Value on or after the Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

(5) If Two Covered Persons are elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 3.5% if the Income Base is increased to a Step-Up Value on or after the younger Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

We reserve the right to modify the rates referenced in the table above at any time for prospectively issued contracts and we will supplement the prospectus prior to any change being effective.

Are there investment requirements if I elect a living benefit?

Yes, you must allocate your assets, including Purchase Payments and the Continuation Contribution, if any, to a combination of the Secure Value Account and Variable Portfolios as detailed below.

With respect to amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account, the crediting interest rate will never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate specified in your contract. The crediting interest rate, once established, will not change for each allocation to the Secure Value Account for the duration of the guarantee period. The guarantee period for the Secure Value Account is a one year period that automatically renews every year from the date of each allocation to the Secure Value Account, unless the living benefit has been cancelled. Each allocation to the Secure Value Account may have different crediting interest rates. You may not reallocate your money in the Secure Value Account to a DCA or Fixed Account, if available, or to the Variable Portfolios at any time unless the living benefit is cancelled.

You may use available DCA Fixed Accounts to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.

Please see Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS

AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for specific investment requirements applicable to your Living Benefit.

How do my investment requirements impact my feature and contract?

Before you elect a living benefit, you should carefully consider whether the investment requirements associated with the living benefits meet your investment objectives and risk tolerance.

The investment requirements may reduce the need to rely on the guarantees provided by these living benefits because they allocate your investment across asset classes and potentially limit exposure to market volatility. As a result, you may have better, or worse, investment returns by allocating your investments more aggressively. Therefore, the investment restrictions reduce the Company’s risk that the Contract Value will be reduced to zero before the Covered Person(s)’ death. Thus, these investment restrictions would reduce the likelihood that the Company would use its own assets to make payments in connection with the living benefit guarantee. Please consult your financial representative regarding which Variable Portfolios are appropriate for the Living Benefit you elected.

To be considered in Good Order, your allocation instructions for any Purchase Payment as well as your target allocations

if you invest in a DCA Fixed Account must comply with the investment requirements, provided under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT, for the amount not invested in the Secure Value Account. You may not transfer any amounts between the Secure Value Account and the Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure Value Account may not be used as a target account if you are using the DCA Program to comply with investment requirements. You may not request any specific amount of any withdrawal to be deducted solely from the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the contract value.

We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable Portfolios are added, deleted, substituted, merged or otherwise reorganized. We will promptly notify you in writing of any changes to the investment requirements due to additions, deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options. The required allocation percentage to the Secure Value Account will not change for the life of your contract.

Rebalancing and Investment Requirements

We will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing. If rebalancing instructions are not provided, we will align your rebalancing allocations with your Purchase Payment allocation instructions, or if using a DCA Fixed Account, your target DCA instructions. We require quarterly rebalancing because market performance, transfers, and withdrawal activity may result in your contract’s allocations going outside these requirements. Quarterly rebalancing will ensure that your allocation will continue to comply with the investment requirements for this feature.

Automatic transfers and/or systematic withdrawals will not result in rebalancing before the next automatic quarterly rebalancing occurs. The day following any transfer or withdrawal you initiate, we will rebalance in accordance with your most current and compliant Automatic Asset Rebalancing instructions on file. If you do not provide new rebalancing instructions at the time you initiate a transfer, we will update your ongoing rebalancing instructions to reflect the percentage allocations resulting from that transfer (“Default Rebalancing Instructions”) which will replace any previous rebalancing instructions you may have provided.

If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions would result in allocations inconsistent with the investment requirements, we will revert to the last compliant instructions on file. You can modify your rebalancing instructions, as long as they are consistent with the investment requirements, at any time by calling the Annuity Service Center. If we cannot complete automatic rebalancing according to your current instructions due to Variable

Portfolio changes (including closures, substitutions, or mergers), we reserve the right to allocate the applicable amounts that would have been transferred to the impacted Variable Portfolio(s) to a money market option available under the contract. Please see AUTOMATIC ASSET REBALANCING PROGRAM above.

You may not rebalance amounts in the Secure Value Account or DCA Fixed Accounts under the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.

What are the factors used to calculate Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder?

The benefit offered by Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder is calculated by considering the factors described below.

First, we consider the Income Credit Period. The Income Credit Period is the period of time over which we calculate the Income Credit. The Income Credit Period begins on the Benefit Effective Date and ends 12 years later.

Second, we determine if the Anniversary Value is the Highest Anniversary Value. The Anniversary Value equals your contract value on any Benefit Year Anniversary

Third, we determine the Income Base which initially is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase Payment received prior to the first contract anniversary, and is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals. If you do not take any withdrawals before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base will be increased to at least the Minimum Income Base on the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary. The Minimum Income Base is equal to 200% of your first Benefit Year’s Purchase Payments.

Fourth, we determine the Income Credit Base which is used solely as a basis for calculating the Income Credit during the Income Credit Period. The initial Income Credit Base is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Credit Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase Payment received prior to the first contract anniversary, and is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals.

Fifth, we determine the Income Credit.

If you elect Polaris Income Plus, the Income Credit is equal to 5.5% (“Income Credit Percentage”) of the Income Credit Base on each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Income Credit Period. The Income Credit Percentage is reduced but not eliminated in any Benefit Year in which cumulative withdrawals during the preceding Benefit Year are less than 5.5% of the Income Base and not greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount applicable to the income option you elected.

If you elect Polaris Income Builder, the Income Credit is equal to 5% of the Income Credit Base on each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Income Credit Period. The Income Credit may only be added to the Income Base if no withdrawals are taken in a Benefit Year. For example, if you take a withdrawal in Benefit Year 2, you will not be

eligible for an Income Credit to be added to your Income Base on your second Benefit Year Anniversary; however, if you do not take a withdrawal in Benefit Year 3, you will be eligible for an Income Credit to be added to your Income Base on your third Benefit Year Anniversary.

Sixth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, which represents the maximum percentage of the Income Base that can be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base and the Income Credit Base, if applicable. If your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of the Income Base you will receive each Benefit Year thereafter until the death of the Covered Person(s).

The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage are determined by three factors: 1) whether there is one or two Covered Person(s); 2) the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of first withdrawal; and 3) the income option elected. Additionally, if applicable to the income option you elect, the Protected Income Payment Percentage may differ depending on whether withdrawals are taken before age 65 and if a new Highest Anniversary Value is achieved on or after the Covered Person(s) 65th birthday.

Please see the table under “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” above for the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage.

Seventh, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base, and if applicable, the Income Credit Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is calculated by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. If your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment is determined by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage.

Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals. Please see “What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder?” below.

What are the factors used to calculate Polaris Income Plus Daily?

The benefit offered by Polaris Income Plus Daily is calculated by considering the factors described below.

First, we determine the Step-up Values.

Second, we determine the Income Base, which initially is equal to the first Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent Purchase Payment received prior to the first contract anniversary, and is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals.

Third, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage, which represents the maximum percentage of the Income Base that can be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base. If your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment Percentage represents the percentage of the Income Base you will receive each Benefit Year thereafter until the death of the Covered Person(s).

Please see the table under “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” above for the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage.

Fourth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year while the contract value is greater than zero, without reducing the Income Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is calculated by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. If your contract value is reduced to zero but your Income Base is greater than zero, the Protected Income Payment is determined by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage.

Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals. Please see “What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus Daily?” below.

How can the Income Base and Income Credit Base be increased for Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder?

On each Benefit Year Anniversary, the Income Base is automatically increased to the greater of (1) the Highest Anniversary Value; or (2) the current Income Base plus the Income Credit, if any. In addition, the Income Base will be at least the Minimum Income Base on the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary provided no withdrawals have been taken before that anniversary.

On each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Income Credit Period, the Income Credit Base is automatically increased to the Highest Anniversary Value, if the Income Base is increased to the Highest Anniversary Value. The Income Credit Base is not increased if an Income Credit is added to the Income Base.

Increases to your Income Base and Income Credit Base occur on Benefit Year Anniversaries while the contract value is greater than zero. However, Purchase Payments increase your Income Base and Income Credit Base at the time they are received. Since Highest Anniversary Values are

determined only on the Benefit Year Anniversaries, your Income Base and Income Credit Base will not increase if your contract value is higher on days other than the Benefit Year Anniversaries.

How can the Income Base be increased for Polaris Income Plus Daily?

If no withdrawals have been taken, the Income Base is increased daily to the Step-up Value.

After the first withdrawal has been taken, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the highest Step-up Value since the first withdrawal (“first look-back”) or, if one or more Excess Withdrawals have been taken in that Benefit Year, to the highest Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal.

After the first look-back, the Income Base is increased only on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back to the highest Step-up Value since the last Benefit Year Anniversary or, if one or more Excess Withdrawals have been taken in that Benefit Year, to the highest Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal.

If the contract value has been reduced to zero, the Income Base will no longer be recalculated. Please see “What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder?”and“What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus Daily?”below.

How do increases and decreases in the Income Base impact the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount?

Increases in the Income Base

Every time the Income Base is increased, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying the increased Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. Please see “How can the Income Base and Income Credit Base be increased for Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder?” and “How can the Income Base be increased for Polaris Income Plus Daily?” above.

Decreases in the Income Base

Excess Withdrawals reduce your Income Base on the date the Excess Withdrawal occurs. Any Excess Withdrawal in a Benefit Year reduces the Income Base in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the Excess Withdrawal. As a result of a reduction of the Income Base, the new Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be equal to the reduced Income Base multiplied by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. The last recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in a given Benefit Year is available for withdrawal at the beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than the previous Benefit Year’s Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. When the contract value is less than the Income Base, Excess Withdrawals will reduce the Income Base by an amount which is greater than the amount of the Excess

Withdrawal. In addition, you will not be eligible for an Income Credit in that Benefit Year. Please see “What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder?” and “What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus Daily?” below.

What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder?

The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and the Income Credit Base may change over time as a result of the timing and amount of withdrawals. If you take a withdrawal before the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary, your Income Base is not eligible to be at least the Minimum Income Base.

Withdrawals during a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base or Income Credit Base. However, if you choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year, you may not carry over the unused amount for withdrawal in subsequent years. Your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of taking less than the entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please note that if you delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals.

You should not elect a Living Benefit if you plan to take Excess Withdrawals since those withdrawals may significantly reduce the value of or terminate the Living Benefit.

The impact of withdrawals on specific factors is further explained below:

Income Base and Income Credit Base: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year exceeds the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base and Income Credit Base will be reduced for those withdrawals. For each Excess Withdrawal taken, the Income Base and Income Credit Base are reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. This means that the reduction in the Income Base and Income Credit Base could be more or less than a dollar-for-dollar reduction.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount: The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is recalculated each time there is a change in the Income Base. Accordingly, if the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year does not exceed the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that year, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not change for the next year unless your Income Base is increased. If you take an Excess Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying the reduced Income Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. This recalculated Maximum Annual

Withdrawal Amount is available for withdrawal at the beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than your previous Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.

Protected Income Payment: If the Income Base is greater than zero, but the contract value has been reduced to zero due to unfavorable investment performance, deduction of fees, or withdrawals within the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, we will pay any remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for the current Benefit Year. Thereafter, you will receive the Protected Income Payment each year over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s) which is calculated by multiplying the Income Base when contract value is reduced to zero by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage. The Income Base is no longer increased on Benefit Year Anniversaries after the contract value has been reduced to zero. As a result, the Protected Income Payment is calculated once and will not change. Please see “What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?” below.

All withdrawals from the contract, including withdrawals taken under these Living Benefits, will reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may impact other provisions of your contract. Unfavorable investment experience and/or fees will also reduce your contract value. In addition, withdrawals under these Living Benefits will reduce the free withdrawal amount and may be subject to applicable withdrawal charges if in excess of the free withdrawal amount. The sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not be assessed a withdrawal charge. Partial withdrawals under these Living Benefits must be deducted proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and Secure Value Account in which you are invested. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above and EXPENSES below.

What are the effects of withdrawals on Polaris Income Plus Daily?

The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount and the Income Base may change over time as a result of the timing and amount of withdrawals.

Withdrawals during a Benefit Year that in total are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base. However, if you choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year, you may not carry over the unused amount for withdrawal in subsequent years. Your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of taking less than the entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please note that if you delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals.

You should not elect a Living Benefit if you plan to take Excess Withdrawals since those withdrawals may significantly reduce the value of or terminate the Living Benefit.

The impact of withdrawals on specific factors is further explained below:

Income Base: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year exceeds the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base will be reduced for those withdrawals. For each Excess Withdrawal taken, the Income Base is reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. This means that the reduction in the Income Base could be more or less than a dollar-for-dollar reduction.

Look-back Periods: If you take one or more Excess Withdrawals in a Benefit Year, the Income Base may be increased on the Benefit Year Anniversary by looking back only to the highest Step-up Value since the last Excess Withdrawal. This means that if you take an

Excess Withdrawal, you lose the opportunity to lock in a potentially higher Step-up Value that may have occurred prior to that Excess Withdrawal during that Benefit Year.

All withdrawals from the contract, including withdrawals taken under this Living Benefit, will reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may impact other provisions of your contract. Unfavorable investment experience and/or fees will also reduce your contract value. In addition, withdrawals under this Living Benefit will reduce the free withdrawal amount and may be subject to applicable withdrawal charges if in excess of the free withdrawal amount. The sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not be assessed a withdrawal charge. Partial withdrawals under this Living Benefit must be deducted proportionately from each Variable Portfolio and Secure Value Account in which you are invested. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above and EXPENSES below.

What is the fee for Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily?

The fee for Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base and deducted from the contract value on a quarterly basis beginning on the first Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the Benefit Effective Date. Please see APPENDIX B - STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state specific information regarding the assessment of the fee. After the first Benefit Year, on each Benefit Quarter Anniversary, we will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the previous Benefit Quarter; and (2) determine the fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Please see fee table below:

Number of Covered Persons	Initial Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annual Fee Rate	Minimum Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annualized Fee Rate Decrease or Increase Each Benefit Quarter*
One Covered Person	1.10%	2.20%	0.60%	±0.25%
Two Covered Persons	1.35%	2.70%	0.60%	±0.25%

The quarterly fee rate will not decrease or increase by more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25%/ 4).

The initial Annual Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index (“VIX®”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximums identified in the table above.

Should the VIX no longer be appropriate or available, we would substitute the VIX with another measure of market volatility for determining the fee. If we substitute the VIX, we will notify you; however, the maximum and minimum annual fee rates described in this prospectus are guaranteed for the life of your contract. Please see APPENDIX C — FORMULA AND EXAMPLES OF CALCULATIONS OF THE POLARIS INCOME PLUS, POLARIS INCOME BUILDER AND POLARIS INCOME PLUS DAILY FEE.

For Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder, an increase in the Income Base due to an addition of an Income Credit, attaining a new Highest Anniversary Value or an addition of subsequent Purchase Payments prior to the first contract anniversary will result in an increase to the amount of the fee you pay since the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as described above. Please note that this means the addition of an Income Credit will lead to paying a higher fee in any given period than without the addition of the Income Credit, and in certain instances, the value of the Income Credit may be more than offset by the amount of the fee. You will be assessed a non-refundable fee each quarter regardless of whether or not you take any withdrawals.

For Polaris Income Plus Daily, an increase in the Income Base due to attaining a new Step-up Value or an addition of subsequent Purchase Payment prior to the first contract anniversary will result in an increase to the amount of the fee you pay since the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as described above.

If your contract value falls to zero, the fee will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the living benefit is still in effect while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date when the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter Anniversaries.

Due to the investment requirements associated with the election of these living benefits, you may invest a portion of your assets in the following Variable Portfolios:

•

SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation

•

SA Schroders VCP Global Allocation

•

SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced

•

SA VCP Dynamic Allocation

•

SA VCP Dynamic Strategy

Each of these Variable Portfolios utilize an investment strategy that is intended, in part, to maintain a relatively

stable exposure to equity market volatility over time. Accordingly, when the market is in a prolonged state of higher volatility, your fee rate may be increased and each of these Variable Portfolios may decrease its exposure to equity markets, thereby reducing the likelihood that you will achieve a higher Anniversary Value. Similarly, when the market is in a prolonged state of lower volatility, your fee rate may be decreased and each of these Variable Portfolios may increase its exposure to equity markets.

What happens if the contract value is reduced to zero while the Income Base is greater than zero?

If the contract value is reduced to zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, we will pay the remaining Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount for that Benefit Year. Thereafter we will pay the Protected Income Payment over the remaining lifetime of the Covered Person(s).

If an Excess Withdrawal reduces your contract value to zero, no further benefits are payable under the contract and your contract along with the Living Benefit will terminate.

If your contract value is reduced to zero, you may no longer make transfers, and no death benefit is payable. Therefore, you should be aware that, particularly during times of unfavorable investment performance, withdrawals taken under the Living Benefit may reduce the contract value to zero, thereby terminating any other benefits of the contract.

In addition, for Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder, an Income Credit is not available if the contract value is reduced to zero, even if a benefit remains payable.

When the contract value equals zero but the Income Base is greater than zero, to receive any remaining Living Benefit, you must select one of the following:

The Protected Income Payment divided equally and paid on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency as selected by you until the date of death of the Covered Person(s); or

Any option mutually agreeable between you and us.

Once you elect an option above, it cannot be changed. If you do not select an option above, the remaining benefit will be paid as option 1 above. This amount will be divided equally and paid on a quarterly basis until the date of death of the Covered Person(s). No amount is payable thereafter.

Additional important information
applicable to all optional living benefits

When and how may I elect a living benefit?

You may elect a living benefit at the time of contract issue (the “Benefit Effective Date”). You may elect to have the living benefit cover only your life or the lives of both you and your spouse, the “Covered Person(s).” If the contract is not owned by a natural person, references to Owner(s) apply to the Annuitant(s). To elect the living benefit,

Covered Persons must meet the age requirements. The age requirements vary depending on the type of contract and the number of Covered Persons. The age requirements for optional death benefits and other optional features may be different than those listed here. You must meet the age requirements for those features in order to elect them.

Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Plus Daily —
If you elect one Covered Person:

	Covered Person
	Minimum Age	Maximum Age
One Owner	45	80
Joint Owners(1)	45	80

Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Plus Daily —
If you elect two Covered Persons:

	Covered Person #1		Covered Person #2
	Minimum Age	Maximum Age	Minimum Age	Maximum Age
Non-Qualified: Joint Owners(2)	45	80	45	85
Non-Qualified: One Owner with Spousal Beneficiary	45	80	45	N/A(3)
Qualified: One Owner with Spousal Beneficiary	45	80	45	N/A(3)

Polaris Income Builder —
If you elect one Covered Person:

	Covered Person
	Minimum Age	Maximum Age
One Owner	65	80
Joint Owners(1)	65	80

Polaris Income Builder —
If you elect two Covered Persons:

	Covered Person #1		Covered Person #2
	Minimum Age	Maximum Age	Minimum Age	Maximum Age
Non-Qualified: Joint Owners(2)	65	80	65	85
Non-Qualified: One Owner with Spousal Beneficiary	65	80	65	N/A(3)
Qualified: One Owner with Spousal Beneficiary	65	80	65	N/A(3)

(1)

Based on the age of the older Owner.

(2)

Based on the age of the younger Joint Owner.

(3)

The age requirement is based solely on the single owner for purposes of issuing the contract with the living benefit. The Spousal Beneficiary’s age is not considered in determining the maximum issue age of the second Covered Person.

If I own a Qualified contract, how do Required Minimum Distributions impact my Living Benefit?

As the original Owner, or Continuing Spouse (two Covered Persons elected) electing to treat the annuity contract as

their own, if you are taking required minimum distributions (“RMD”) from this contract, and the amount of the RMD (based only on the contract to which the feature is elected and using the Uniform Lifetime Table or Joint Life Expectancy Table from the regulations under the Internal Revenue Code) is greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any given Benefit Year, no portion of the RMD will be treated as an Excess Withdrawal.

We will provide RMD favorable treatment, in each Benefit Year, to the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or the RMD amount. Any portion of a withdrawal in a Benefit Year which exceeds the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount or RMD amount will be considered an Excess Withdrawal. If you must take RMD from this contract and want to ensure that these withdrawals will not permanently reduce future withdrawal amounts, your total distribution(s) during the current contract year must not exceed the greater of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount under the Living Benefit or the RMD amount as calculated by our Annuity Service Center. Therefore, if you plan to take an Excess Withdrawal, then this feature may not be appropriate for you.

The age at which you must begin taking RMDs is 73 (if you were born January 1, 1951 or later), 72 (if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951), or 70 ½ (if you were born before July 1, 1949).

If you are transferring from another company and have already reached the age you must begin taking RMDs, you should take the current tax year’s RMD prior to the transfer, as we cannot systematically calculate the RMD as we do not possess the valuation for the previous year end. Further, if you are turning the age you must begin taking RMDs, you should know that although tax code allows for deferral of the first withdrawal to April of the tax year following your attainment of the age you must begin taking RMDs, doing so may result in subsequent withdrawals being treated as Excess Withdrawals for that Benefit Year.

If you have elected Polaris Income Plus and the RMD amount is greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, but less than 5.5% of the Income Base, an Income Credit equal to the difference between the RMD and 5.5% of the Income Base will be included in determining any Income Base increase in that Benefit Year. If the RMD amount is greater than 5.5% of the Income Base, no Income Credit will be included in the calculation of the Income Base.

If you have elected Polaris Income Builder, no Income Credit will be included in the calculation of the Income Base when an RMD is taken.

What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected one Covered Person?

If there is one Covered Person and that person dies, the surviving spousal joint Owner or Spousal Beneficiary may elect to:

Make a death claim if the contract value is greater than zero, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or

Continue the contract if the contract value is greater than zero, without the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee.

What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected two Covered Persons?

If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of one Covered Person, the surviving Covered Person may elect to:

Make a death claim if the contract value is greater than zero, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or

Continue the contract with the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee for two Covered Persons.

The components of the Living Benefit in effect at the time of spousal continuation will not change. The surviving Covered Person can elect to receive withdrawals in accordance with the provisions of the Living Benefit elected based on the age of the younger Covered Person at the time the first withdrawal was taken. If no withdrawals were taken prior to the spousal continuation, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the Protected Income Payment Percentage will be based on the age of the surviving Covered Person at the time the first withdrawal is taken. Please see “How do Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder work?” and “How does Polaris Income Plus Daily work?”above.

For Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder only

If spousal continuation occurs, the Continuing Spouse will continue to receive any increase to the Income Base for Highest Anniversary Value or if applicable, any Income Credit during the Income Credit Period, while the contract value is greater than zero. The Continuing Spouse is also eligible to receive the Minimum Income Base on the 12th Benefit Year Anniversary if no withdrawals have been taken during the first 12 Benefit Years following the Benefit Effective Date.

For Polaris Income Plus Daily only

If spousal continuation occurs, the Continuing Spouse will continue to receive any increase to the Income Base for Step-up Values as described under “How can the Income Base be Increased for Polaris Income Plus Daily?”

Can a non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any remaining benefits under my living benefit upon the death of the second spouse?

No. Upon the death of the Covered Person(s), if the contract value is greater than zero, a non-spousal Beneficiary must make an election under the death benefit provisions of the contract, which terminates the Living Benefit. Please see DEATH BENEFITS below.

What happens to my Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?

If the contract value and the Income Base are greater than zero on the Latest Annuity Date, you begin the Income Phase and therefore, you must select one of the following annuity income options:

Annuitize the contract value under the contract’s annuity provisions (please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS below); or

Annuitize the contract and elect to receive the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as of the Latest Annuity Date for a fixed period while you are alive. The fixed period is determined by dividing the contract value on the Latest Annuity Date by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. Any applicable Premium Taxes will be deducted from the contract value prior to determining the fixed period. After that fixed period ends, you will receive the Protected Income Payment, which is calculated by multiplying the Income Base as of the Latest Annuity Date by the applicable Protected Income Payment Percentage, paid until the death(s) of the Covered Person(s). The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount fixed period payments and the subsequent Protected Income Payments will be divided equally on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency, as selected by you.

Any annuity income option mutually agreeable between you and us.

Once you begin the Income Phase by electing one of the annuity income payment options above: (1) the Income Base will no longer be adjusted either for Highest Anniversary Values or additional Income Credits if you elected Polaris Income Plus or Polaris Income Builder; (2) the Income Base will no longer be adjusted for Step-up Values if you elected Polaris Income Plus Daily.

If you do not elect an option listed above, on the Latest Annuity Date, we will annuitize the contract value in accordance with Option 2 above.

Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?

The Living Benefit may not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary unless you surrender your contract. The Living Benefit may be cancelled by you on or

after the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table below.

Cancellation Request Received	Cancellation Effective Date
Years 1-5	5th Benefit Year Anniversary
Years 5+	Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the receipt of the cancellation request

Once cancellation is effective, the guarantees under the Living Benefits are terminated. In addition, the investment requirements for the Living Benefits will no longer apply to your contract. You may not re-elect or reinstate the Living Benefit after cancellation.

If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of the first Covered Person, the surviving Covered Person (generally, the Continuing Spouse) may cancel the Living Benefit on or after the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table above. Upon the cancellation effective date of the Living Benefit, there will be one final fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the cancellation occurs, on the same Benefit Quarter Anniversary. Thereafter, the fee will no longer be charged.

What happens to the Secure Value Account and Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions if I elect to cancel Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder or Polaris Income Plus Daily?

Amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will be automatically transferred to the 1-Year Fixed Account, if available. If the 1-Year Fixed Account is not available in the state in which your contract was issued, amounts will be transferred to a money market portfolio. From the day following the automated transfer from the Secure Value Account, you may transfer this amount to another available investment option under the contract for a period of 90 days during which the transfer will not count against the annual number of free transfers or U.S. Mail transfers, or incur a transfer fee. You may move your funds out of the money market portfolio at any time.

The Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program and your instructions on file will not be terminated or changed upon cancellation of the Living Benefit. Amounts transferred from the Secure Value Account into the 1-Year Fixed Account or a money market portfolio will not impact the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program instructions on file and that transfer will not result in new Default Rebalancing Instructions. On or after cancellation of these features, you may provide new rebalancing instructions or you may choose to terminate the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program by contacting the Annuity Service Center. Please see APPENDIX B - STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state specific information regarding amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account and Automatic Asset Allocation Rebalancing Program upon cancellation of any Living Benefit.

Are there circumstances under which my Living Benefit will be automatically cancelled?

The Living Benefit will automatically be cancelled upon the occurrence of one of the following:

(i)

Annuitization of the contract; or

(ii)

Termination or surrender of the contract; or

(iii)

A death benefit is paid resulting in the contract being terminated; or

(iv)

An Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value and Income Base to zero; or

(v)

Death of the Covered Person, if only one is elected; or, if two Covered Persons are elected, death of the surviving Covered Person; or

(vi)

A change that removes all Covered Persons from the contract except as noted below under “Are there circumstances under which guaranteed withdrawals for two Covered Persons, if elected, terminate for one of the Covered Persons?”; or

(vii)

A Change of the Owner or Assignment; or

(viii)You elect to cancel Your Living Benefit.

If a change of ownership occurs from a natural person to a non-natural entity, the original natural Owner(s) must also be the Annuitant(s) after the ownership change to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. A change of ownership from a non-natural entity to a natural person can only occur if the new natural Owner(s) was the original natural Annuitant(s) in order to prevent termination of the Living Benefit. Any ownership change is contingent upon prior review and approval by the Company.

Are there circumstances under which guaranteed withdrawals for two Covered Persons, if elected, terminate for one of the Covered Persons?

Under any of the following circumstances, the living benefit will provide a guarantee for one Covered Person and not the lifetime of the other Covered Person:

One of the two Covered Persons is removed from the contract, due to reasons other than death; or

The original spousal joint Owners or Spousal Beneficiary, who are the Covered Persons, are no longer married at the time of death of the first spouse.

Under these circumstances, the fee for the living benefit based on two Covered Persons will continue to be charged and the guaranteed withdrawals based on two Covered Persons are payable for one Covered Person only. However, the remaining Covered Person may choose to terminate the living benefit as described under “Can I elect to cancel my living benefit?” above.

Any amounts that we may pay under the feature in excess of your contract value are subject to the Company’s financial strength and claims-paying ability.

Death Benefits

You must elect one of the death benefit options at the time you purchase your contract. Some options are available for an additional fee, as described later in this section. Once elected, you cannot change your death benefit option. You should discuss the available options with your financial representative to determine which option is best for you.

Certain death benefit options are either no longer offered or have changed since first being offered. If your contract was issued prior to January 23, 2012, please see APPENDIX F – DEATH BENEFITS AND SPOUSAL CONTINUATION DEATH BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO January 23, 2012 for details regarding those death benefit options.

We do not pay a death benefit if:

•

your contract value is reduced to zero; or

•

you die after you begin the Income Phase. Your Beneficiary would receive any remaining guaranteed annuity income payments in accordance with the annuity income option you selected. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS.

We pay a death benefit to your Beneficiary(ies) if you die during the Accumulation Phase. The death benefit will become payable upon death of the following individual.

Owner	Payable Upon Death of
Natural persons	Owner (or first to die, if jointly owned)
Non-natural person (e.g. Trust)	Annuitant

Beneficiary Designation

You must notify us in writing of the Beneficiary(ies) who will receive any death benefit payments under your contract. You may change the Beneficiary at any time, unless otherwise specified below.

•

If your contract is jointly owned, the surviving joint Owner must be the sole primary Beneficiary. Any other individual you designate as Beneficiary will be the contingent Beneficiary.

•

If the Owner is a non-natural person then joint Annuitants, if any, shall be each other’s sole primary Beneficiary, except when the Owner is a charitable remainder trust.

•

If the Owner is a trust, whether as an agent for a natural person or otherwise, you should consult with your tax and/or legal adviser to determine whether this contract is an appropriate trust investment.

Death Benefit Processing

We process death benefit requests when we receive all required documentation, including satisfactory proof of death, in Good Order, at the Annuity Service Center.

Satisfactory proof of death includes, but may not be

limited to:

(1)A certified copy of the death certificate; or

(2)A certified copy of a decree of a court of

competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death;

(3)A written statement by a medical doctor who

attended the deceased at the time of death.

When Death Benefits are Calculated

•

All death benefit calculations are made as of the day required documentation is received in Good Order at the Annuity Service Center before Market Close. If the death benefit request is received after Market Close, the death benefit calculation will be made as of the next NYSE business day.

The contract value will remain invested pursuant to the Owner's latest allocation instructions on file subject to the limitations described in this prospectus, until we receive notification of death and/or death claim paperwork in Good Order. Thereafter, a Beneficiary may elect one of the death settlement options by contacting the Annuity Service Center.

If we receive notification of the Owner’s death before any previously requested transaction is completed (including systematic transfer and withdrawal programs), we will cancel the previously requested transaction.

For contracts in which the aggregate of all Purchase Payments in contracts issued by AGL, US Life and/or VALIC to the same Owner/Annuitant are in excess of the Purchase Payments Limit, we reserve the right to limit the death benefit amount that is in excess of contract value at the time we receive all paperwork and satisfactory proof of death. Any limit on the maximum death benefit payable would be mutually agreed upon in writing by you and the Company prior to purchasing the contract.

Effective January 15, 2016, if you have elected a living benefit feature and your contract was issued:

•

Prior to January 23, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the 5th contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

•

On January 23, 2012 to November 11, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 2nd contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

•

On or after November 12, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 1st contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

Death Benefit Settlement Options

Your Beneficiary must elect one of the following settlement options after providing required documentation, including satisfactory proof of death, in Good Order.

•

Lump sum payment; or

•

Annuity Income Option; or

•

Continue the contract as the spousal Beneficiary, or under a Beneficiary continuation option; or

•

Payment option that is mutually agreeable between you and us

In general, the death benefit must be paid within 5 years of the date of death unless the Beneficiary elects to have it payable in the form of an annuity income option. If the Beneficiary elects an annuity income option, it must be paid over the Beneficiary’s life expectancy or a shorter period. Payments associated with such election must begin within one year of death. Federal tax law may limit the Beneficiary’s death benefit and payout options available after your death. Please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS.

Beneficiary Continuation Programs

Please consult a tax adviser regarding tax implications about your particular circumstances if you are considering a Beneficiary Continuation option.

Extended Legacy Program

The Beneficiary to an existing contract issued by the Company may elect the Extended Legacy Program. The program may not be elected in conjunction with any other settlement option.

Upon election of the Extended Legacy Program:

•

The contract continues in Owner’s name for the benefit of the Beneficiary who elected the Extended Legacy Program.

•

The Beneficiary may withdraw all or a portion of the contract value at any time and withdrawals are not subject to withdrawal charges.

•

The Beneficiary may choose to participate in the Systematic Withdrawal Program and the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program.

Upon election of the Extended Legacy Program, the beneficiary may choose to receive the death benefit under (1) a 5-year settlement option or (2) in the form of withdrawals for a longer period of time:

Under the 5-year settlement option, the Beneficiary may take withdrawals as desired, but the death benefit proceeds must be distributed no later than five years from the date of death of the Owner of the contract.

Note: If an IRA Owner died prior to January 1, 2020, the 5-year settlement option is not available if the date of the Owner's death occurred after the required beginning date for distributions.

If the beneficiary elects to take the death benefit in the form of withdrawals over a longer period of time:

•

Generally, IRS required minimum distributions must be made at least annually over a period not to exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy as determined in the calendar year after the Owner’s death, with the flexibility to withdraw more than the IRS required minimum distribution.

•

Payments must begin no later than the first anniversary of death for Non-Qualified contracts or December 31 of the year following the year of death for IRAs.

Note: for IRAs, if the Owner’s death occurred on or after January 1, 2020, choosing to receive the death benefit in the form of withdrawals for a longer period of time is only available for a Spousal Beneficiary or a Non-Spousal Beneficiary who is less than 10 years younger than the IRA Owner. Other Non-Spousal Beneficiaries may instead elect the 5-year settlement option, if available.

If the contract value is less than the death benefit amount as of the date we receive satisfactory proof of death and all required documentation in Good Order, we will increase the contract value by the amount which the death benefit exceed contract value.

We will process an Extended Legacy election as of the

date we receive the following in Good Order at the Annuity

Service Center:

•Death Claim form electing Extended Legacy

Program; and

•Satisfactory proof of death of the original Owner.

Upon the Beneficiary’s request to our Annuity Service Center, we will provide a prospectus and Extended Legacy Guide, with important information including expenses, investment options and administrative features. The prospectus that the Beneficiary will receive may be for a different product than the original Owner purchased.

The Extended Legacy Guide includes important information regarding the program offered to Beneficiaries on or after September 20, 2020.

Restrictions on Extended Legacy Program

•

The Extended Legacy Program cannot be elected with rollover contracts from other companies.

•

No Purchase Payments are permitted.

•

Living Benefits and optional death benefits that may have been elected by the original Owner are not available and any charges associated with these features will no longer be deducted.

•

In the event of the Beneficiary’s death, any remaining contract value will be paid to the person(s) named by the Beneficiary.

•

The contract may not be assigned and ownership may not be changed or jointly owned.

•

Any Fixed Accounts and/or DCA Fixed Accounts that may have been available to the original Owner will no longer be available for investment.

Expenses

We will charge the Beneficiary an annual Base Contract Expense of 1.15%. This charge is deducted daily from the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios.

Investment Options

•

The Beneficiary may transfer funds among the available Variable Portfolios;

•

Variable Portfolios may differ from those available to the original Owner

•

Variable Portfolios may be of a different share class subject to higher 12b-1 fees; and

•

Beneficiaries that elected the Extended Legacy Program prior to September 20, 2010 will continue to be offered the same Variable Portfolios as the original Owner.

Inherited Account Program

The Inherited Account Program, if available, can allow a Beneficiary of another company’s annuity contract to transfer their inherited Non-Qualified deferred annuity or certain Beneficiaries to transfer their inherited IRA to fund a new contract issued by the Company.

•

The Beneficiary of the transferred contract becomes the Owner (as the Beneficiary of the deceased) of the contract issued by us.

•

The Internal Revenue Code requires minimum distributions from inherited IRAs and inherited Non-Qualified deferred annuity contracts.

•

Once the contract is issued, a Systematic Withdrawal Program must be established and cannot be terminated.

•

Upon your death, your designated Beneficiary will receive the standard death benefit, unless you elect an optional death benefit at contract issue, for an additional fee.

We will process an Inherited Account election as of the

date we receive the following at the Annuity Service

Center:

•Inherited Account and Required Minimum

Distribution Election Form; and

•New contract application

Restrictions on Inherited Account Program

•

No Purchase Payments are permitted after the contract has been issued.

•

Optional Living Benefits cannot be elected under the Inherited Account Program.

•

The contract may not be assigned and ownership may not be changed or jointly owned.

Expenses

The contract issued is subject to the same fees and charges applicable to any Owner of the contract, including withdrawal charges if applicable.

Investment Options

All Variable Portfolios and available Fixed Accounts offered by the contract are available for investment. You may transfer funds among the investment options.

Death Benefit Defined Terms

The term “Net Purchase Payment” is used frequently in describing the death benefit payable. Net Purchase Payment is an on-going calculation. It does not represent a contract value.

We determine Net Purchase Payments as Purchase Payments less adjustments for withdrawals. Net Purchase Payments are increased by the amount of subsequent Purchase Payments, if any, and reduced for withdrawals, if any, in the same proportion that the contract value was reduced on the date of such withdrawal.

The term “Withdrawal Adjustment” is used, if you have elected a Living Benefit, to describe the way in which the amount of the death benefit will be adjusted for withdrawals depending on when you take a withdrawal and the amount of the withdrawal. If cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year are taken prior to your 81st birthday and are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the amount of adjustment will equal the amount of each withdrawal. If a withdrawal is taken prior to your 81st birthday and cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year are in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the contract value and the death benefit are first reduced by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The resulting death benefit is further adjusted by the withdrawal amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount by the percentage by which the Excess Withdrawal reduced the resulting contract value. If a withdrawal is taken on or after your 81st birthday , the amount of adjustment is determined by the percentage by which the withdrawal reduced the contract value.

The term “withdrawals” as used in describing the death benefit options is defined as withdrawals and the fees and charges applicable to those withdrawals.

The Company does not accept Purchase Payments from anyone age 86 or older. Therefore, the death benefit calculations assume that no Purchase Payments are received on or after your 86th birthday. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the first contract anniversary if you have elected a Living Benefit feature.

Death Benefit Options

The standard death benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit are calculated differently depending on whether you have also elected one of the Living Benefits described above.

Standard Death Benefit

The following describes the standard death benefit without election of a Living Benefit:

The standard death benefit is the greater of:

Contract value; or

Net Purchase Payments.

The following describes the standard death benefit with election of a Living Benefit:

The standard death benefit is the greater of:

Contract value; or

Purchase Payments reduced by:

any Withdrawal Adjustments, as defined above, if the Living Benefit has not been terminated; or

any Withdrawal Adjustments, as defined above, prior to the date the Living Benefit is terminated; and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit is terminated.

Please see APPENDIX G for examples of how your death benefit is calculated.

Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit

For an additional fee, you may elect the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit described below which can provide greater protection for your Beneficiaries. You may only elect the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit at the time you purchase your contract and you cannot change your election thereafter at any time. The fee for the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit is 0.25% of the average daily net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. You may pay for the optional death benefit and your Beneficiary may never receive the benefit once you begin the Income Phase. The Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit can only be elected prior to your 81st birthday.

This feature may not be available through the broker-dealer with which your financial representative is affiliated. Please check with your financial representative for availability.

The following describes the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit without election of a Living Benefit:

The death benefit is the greatest of:

Contract value; or

Net Purchase Payments; or

Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary prior to the earlier of your 83rd birthday or date of death, plus Purchase Payments received since that anniversary; and reduced for any withdrawals since that anniversary in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the applicable contract anniversary.

The following describes the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit with election of a Living Benefit:

The death benefit is the greatest of:

Contract value; or

Purchase Payments reduced by:

any Withdrawal Adjustments, if the Living Benefit has not been terminated: or

any Withdrawal Adjustments, prior to the date the Living Benefit is terminated; and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit is terminated; or

Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary prior to the earlier of your 83rd birthday or date of death and reduced by:

any Withdrawal Adjustments since that contract anniversary, if the Living Benefit has not been terminated; or

any Withdrawal Adjustments since that contract anniversary, prior to the date the Living Benefit is terminated; and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit is terminated.

The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the applicable anniversary.

For a description of the death benefits for contracts issued prior to January 23, 2012, please see Appendix F.

Please see APPENDIX G for examples of how your death benefit is calculated.

Spousal Continuation

The Continuing Spouse may elect to continue the contract after your death. A spousal continuation can only take place once, upon the death of the original Owner of the contract.

Upon election of Spousal Continuation:

•

Generally, any benefits and elected features under the contract remain the same.

•

Continuing Spouse is subject to the same fees, charges and expenses applicable to the original Owner of the contract. Please see EXPENSES.

•

Continuing Spouse may not terminate the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit if elected at contract issue.

•

Continuing Spouse will be subject to the investment risk of Variable Portfolios, as was the original Owner.

Non-spousal joint Owners (including Domestic Partners) are not eligible for spousal continuation, under current tax law.

Upon spousal continuation, we will add a Continuation Contribution to the contract. The Continuation Contribution is only considered a Purchase Payment for purposes of determining the death benefit following the Continuing Spouse’s death.

We will process a spousal continuation as of the date we

receive the following at the Annuity Service Center:

•Death Claim form; and

•Satisfactory proof of death of the original Owner.

The age of the Continuing Spouse on the Continuation Date will be used to determine any future death benefits under the contract. If you elected the Return of Purchase Payment death benefit or the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit, the death benefit payable upon the Continuing Spouse’s death would differ depending on the Continuing Spouse’s age on the Continuation Date. Please see APPENDIX E – DEATH BENEFITS FOLLOWING SPOUSAL CONTINUATION for a discussion of the death benefit calculations upon a Continuing Spouse’s death.

Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS above for information on the effect of Spousal Continuation on these benefits.

Expenses

We may deduct the following fees and expenses if applicable from your contract, as described later in this section.

•

Base Contract Expenses

•

Withdrawal Charges

•

Underlying Fund Expenses

•

Contract Maintenance Fee

•

Transfer Fee

•

Optional Living Benefit Fee

•

Optional Death Benefit Fee

Fees and expenses associated with your contract reduce your investment return. Before purchasing this contract, you should consider the effect of fees and expenses on your investment. You should fully discuss this decision with your financial representative. We will not increase certain contract fees, such as the Base Contract Expense or withdrawal charges for the life of your contract. Underlying Fund investment management fees may increase or decrease. Some states may require that we charge less than the amounts described below. Please see APPENDIX B — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state-specific expenses.

We intend to profit from the sale of the contracts. Our profit may be derived as a result of a variety of pricing factors including but not limited to the fees and charges assessed under the contract and/or amounts we may receive from an Underlying Fund, its investment advisor and/or subadvisors (or affiliates thereof). Please see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACT below. The fees, charges, amounts received from the Underlying Funds (or affiliates thereof) and any resulting profit may be used for any corporate purpose including supporting marketing, distribution and/or administration of the contract and, in its role as an intermediary, the Underlying Funds.

Base Contract Expenses

1.65%

(annualized charge as a percentage of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to Variable Portfolios)

The Base Contract Expense (also referred to as Separate Account Charge) compensates the Company for the mortality and expense risk and the costs of contract distribution assumed by the Company.

Generally, the mortality risks assumed by the Company arise from its contractual obligations to make annuity income payments after the Annuity Date and to provide a death benefit. The expense risk assumed by the Company is that the costs of administering the contracts and the Separate Account will exceed the amount received from the fees and charges assessed under the contract. There may not necessarily be a relationship between the administrative charge imposed under the contract and the amount of expenses that may be attributable to the contract.

If these charges do not cover all of our expenses, we will pay the difference. Likewise, if these charges exceed our expenses, we will keep the difference. The mortality and expense risk charge is expected to result in a profit. Profit may be used for any cost or expense including supporting distribution. Please see PAYMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACT below.

If your Beneficiary elects to take the death benefit amount under the Extended Legacy Program, we will deduct an annual Base Contract Expense of 1.15% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. Please see Extended Legacy Program under DEATH BENEFITS.

Withdrawal Charges

The contract provides a penalty-free withdrawal amount every contract year. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above. You may incur a withdrawal charge if you take a withdrawal in excess of the penalty-free withdrawal amount and/or if you fully surrender your contract. Withdrawal Charges reimburse us for the cost of contract sales, expenses associated with issuing your contract and other acquisition expenses.

We apply a withdrawal charge against each Purchase Payment you contribute to the contract. After a Purchase Payment has been in the contract for four complete years, a withdrawal charge no longer applies to that Purchase Payment. The withdrawal charge percentage declines over time for each Purchase Payment in the contract. The withdrawal charge schedule is as follows:

Year Since Purchase Payment Receipt	1	2	3	4	5+
Withdrawal Charge	8%	7%	6%	5%	0%

When calculating the withdrawal charge, we treat withdrawals as coming first from the Purchase Payments that have been in your contract the longest, which means the Purchase Payments that have the lowest Withdrawal Charge percentages. However, for tax purposes, per IRS requirements, your withdrawals are considered as coming first from taxable earnings, then from Purchase Payments, which are not taxable if your contract is Non-Qualified. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above.

If you take a partial withdrawal, you can choose whether any applicable withdrawal charges are deducted from the amount withdrawn or from the contract value remaining after the amount withdrawn. If you fully surrender your contract value, we deduct any applicable withdrawal charges from the amount surrendered.

We will not assess a withdrawal charge when we pay a death benefit or when you annuitize your contract.

Withdrawals made prior to age 59½ may result in tax penalties. Please see TAXES below.

Underlying Fund Expenses

There are deductions from and expenses paid out of the assets of each Underlying Fund. Detailed information about these deductions and expenses can be found in the prospectuses for the Underlying Funds.

Investment Management Fees

Investment management fees are set by the Underlying Funds’ own board of directors, and may vary. These fees are not fixed or specified in your annuity contract.

Each Variable Portfolio purchases shares of a corresponding Underlying Fund. The Accumulation Unit value for each purchased Variable Portfolio share reflects the investment management fees and other expenses of the corresponding Underlying Funds. If you invest in a Master Fund, the Accumulation Unit value will also reflect the investment management fee and other expenses of the corresponding Master Fund.

12b-1 Fees

Certain Underlying Funds available in this product, including the Feeder Funds, assess a 12b-1 fee of 0.25% of the average daily net assets allocated to those Underlying Funds. Over time these fees will increase the cost of your investment.

The 12b-1 fees compensate us for costs associated with the servicing of these shares, including, but not limited to, reimbursing us for expenditures we make to registered representatives in selling firms for providing services to contract Owners who are indirect beneficial Owners of these shares and for maintaining contract Owner accounts.

There is an annualized 0.25% fee applicable to Class 3 shares of Seasons Series Trust and SunAmerica Series Trust, Series II shares of AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) and Class 2 shares of Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust and Class Service shares of Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust. This amount is generally used to pay financial intermediaries for services provided over the life of your contract.

Contract Maintenance Fee

During the Accumulation Phase, we deduct a contract maintenance fee of $50 from your contract once per year on your contract anniversary. This charge compensates us for the cost of administering your contract. The fee is deducted proportionately from your contract value on your contract anniversary by redeeming the number of Accumulation Units invested in the Variable Portfolios and the dollar amount invested in available Fixed Accounts which in total

equal the amount of the fee. If you withdraw your entire contract value, we will deduct the contract maintenance fee from that withdrawal.

If your contract value is $75,000 or more on your contract anniversary date, we currently waive this fee. This waiver is subject to change without notice.

Please see APPENDIX B — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for the state-specific Contract Maintenance Fee.

Transfer Fee

After 15 Transfers

$25

We permit 15 free transfers between investment options each contract year. We charge you $25 for each additional transfer that contract year. The transfer fee compensates us for the cost of processing your transfer.
In Pennsylvania and Texas, any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer fee.

Optional Living Benefit Fees

The Living Benefit fees will be calculated as a percentage of the Income Base for all years in which the Living Benefits are in effect. The fee depends on whether you elect to cover one or two lives. The Living Benefit fee is charged and received by the Company in consideration of the Living Benefit guarantees provided to you.

The fee is deducted proportionately from your contract value by redeeming the number of Accumulation Units invested in the Variable Portfolios and the value in the Secure Value Account, which in total equals the amount of the fee. If your contract value is reduced to zero before the Living Benefit has been cancelled, the fee will no longer be assessed.

We will not assess a quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit is paid before the end of the Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date the fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter Anniversaries.

Optional Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily Living Benefit Fee

Number of Covered Persons	Initial Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annual Fee Rate	Minimum Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annualized Fee Rate Decrease or Increase Each Benefit Quarter*
One Covered Person	1.10%	2.20%	0.60%	±0.25%
Two Covered Persons	1.35%	2.70%	0.60%	±0.25%

The fee rate can decrease or increase no more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25%/ 4).

The Initial Annual Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. After the first Benefit Year, on each Benefit Quarter Anniversary, we will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the previous Benefit Quarter; and (2) determine the fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in VIX. In general, as the average value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximum identified in the table above. Please see APPENDIX C — FORMULA AND EXAMPLES OF CALCULATIONS OF THE POLARIS INCOME PLUS, POLARIS INCOME BUILDER AND POLARIS INCOME PLUS DAILY FEE.

Please see APPENDIX B — STATE CONTRACT AVAILABILITY AND/OR VARIABILITY for state specific information regarding the assessment of the fee.

If your contract was issued prior to October 1, 2013, please see APPENDIX D — LIVING BENEFITS FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO AUGUST 22, 2016 for specific fee information.

Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Fee

If you elect the Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit, the fee is 0.25% of the average daily ending net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolio(s).

Premium Tax

Certain states charge the Company a tax on Purchase Payments that ranges from 0% to 3.5%. Some states assess this premium tax when the contract is issued while other states only assess the tax upon annuitization. The Company may advance any tax amount due, but we will deduct such amount from your contract value only when and if you begin the Income Phase (annuitization).

Income Taxes

We do not currently deduct income taxes from your contract. We reserve the right to do so in the future.

Reduction or Elimination of Fees, Expenses and Additional Amounts Credited

Sometimes sales of contracts to groups of similarly situated individuals may lower our fees and expenses. We determine which groups are eligible for this treatment. Some of the criteria we evaluate to make a determination are size of the group; amount of expected Purchase Payments; relationship existing between us and the prospective purchaser; length of time a group of contracts is expected to remain active; purpose of the purchase and whether that purpose increases the likelihood that our expenses will be reduced; and/or any other factors that we believe indicate that fees and expenses may be reduced.

The Company may make such a determination regarding sales to its employees, its affiliates’ employees and employees of currently contracted broker-dealers; its registered representatives; and immediate family members of all of those described. Currently, the Company credits an additional amount to contracts sold to the following groups: (1) employees of the Company and its affiliates, and their immediate family members; (2) appointed agents and registered representatives of broker-dealers that sell the Company’s and its affiliates’ variable contracts, and the agents’ and registered representatives’ immediate family members; (3) trustees of mutual funds offered in the Company’s and its affiliates’ variable contracts. The additional amount credited to a contract sold to one of the above individuals will generally equal the commission payable on the initial purchase payment for the contract. This means that the additional amount will generally be 5.00% of the initial Purchase Payment.

Certain broker-dealers may limit crediting this additional amount to employees only.

Payments in connection with distribution of the contract

Payments We Make

We make payments in connection with the distribution of the contracts that generally fall into the three categories below.

As a result of the payments that financial representatives may receive from us or other companies, some financial representatives may have a financial incentive to offer you a new contract in place of the one you already own. You should consider exchanging a contract you already own only if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new contract rather than continue to own your existing contract.

Commissions. Registered representatives of affiliated and unaffiliated broker-dealers (“selling firms”) licensed under federal securities laws and state insurance laws sell the contract to the public. The selling firms have entered into written selling agreements with the Company and Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., the distributor of the

contracts. We pay commissions to the selling firms for the sale of your contract. The selling firms are paid commissions for the promotion and sale of the contracts according to one or more schedules. The amount and timing of commissions will vary depending on the selling firm and its selling agreement with us. For example, as one option, we may pay upfront commission only, up to a maximum 6.00% of each Purchase Payment you invest (which may include promotional amounts we may pay periodically as commission specials). Another option may be a lower upfront commission on each Purchase Payment, with a trail commission of up to a maximum 1.50% of contract value annually for the life of the contract.

The registered representative who sells you the contract typically receives a portion of the compensation we pay to his/her selling firm, depending on the agreement between the selling firms and its registered representative and their internal compensation program. We are not involved in determining your registered representatives’ compensation.

Additional Cash Compensation. We may enter into agreements to pay selling firms support fees in the form of additional cash compensation (“revenue sharing”). These revenue sharing payments may be intended to reimburse the selling firms for specific expenses incurred or may be based on sales, certain assets under management, longevity of assets invested with us and/or a flat fee. Asset-based payments primarily create incentives to service and maintain previously sold contracts. Sales-based payments primarily create incentives to make new sales of contracts.

These revenue sharing payments may be consideration for, among other things, product placement/preference and visibility, greater access to train and educate the selling firm’s registered representatives about our contracts, our participation in sales conferences and educational seminars and for selling firms to perform due diligence on our contracts. The amount of these fees may be tied to the anticipated level of our access in that selling firm.

We enter into such revenue sharing arrangements in our discretion and we may negotiate customized arrangements with selling firms, including affiliated and non-affiliated selling firms based on various factors. These special compensation arrangements are not offered to all selling firms and the terms of such arrangements may vary between selling firms depending on, among other things, the level and type of marketing and distribution support provided, assets under management and the volume and size of the sales of our contracts.

If allowed by his or her selling firm, a registered representative or other eligible person may purchase a contract on a basis in which an additional amount is credited to the contract. Please see REDUCTION OR ELIMINATION OF FEES, EXPENSES AND ADDITIONAL AMOUNTS CREDITED above.

We provide a list of firms to whom we paid annual amounts greater than $15,000 under these revenue sharing arrangements in 2025 in the Statement of Additional Information which is available upon request.

Non-Cash Compensation. Some registered representatives and their supervisors may receive various types of non-cash

compensation such as gifts, promotional items and entertainment in connection with our marketing efforts. We may also pay for registered representatives to attend educational and/or business seminars. Any such compensation is paid in accordance with SEC and FINRA rules.

We do not assess a specific charge directly to you or your Separate Account assets in order to cover commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we pay. However, we anticipate recovering these amounts from our profits which are derived from the fees and charges collected under the contract. We hope to benefit from these revenue sharing arrangements through increased sales of our contracts and greater customer service support.

Revenue sharing arrangements may provide selling firms and/or their registered representatives with an incentive to favor sales of our contracts over other variable annuity contracts (or other investments) with respect to which a selling firm does not receive the same level of additional compensation. You should discuss with your selling firm and/or registered representative how they are compensated for sales of a contract and/or any resulting real or perceived conflicts of interest. You may wish to take such revenue sharing arrangements into account when considering or evaluating any recommendation relating to this contract.

Payments We Receive

We and our affiliates may directly or indirectly receive revenue sharing payments from the Trusts, their investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof), in connection with certain administrative, marketing and other services we provide and related expenses we incur. The availability of these revenue sharing arrangements creates an incentive for us to seek and offer Underlying Funds (and classes of shares of such Underlying Funds) that pay us higher amounts. Other Underlying Funds (or available classes of shares) may have lower fees and better overall investment performance. Not all Trusts pay the same amount of revenue sharing. Therefore, the amount of fees we collect may be greater or smaller based on the Underlying Funds you select.

We and our affiliates generally receive three kinds of payments described below.

Rule 12b-1 or Service Fees. We receive 12b-1 fees of up to 0.25% or service fees of up to 0.50% of the average daily net assets in certain Underlying Funds, including the Feeder Funds that are attributable to the contract and to certain other variable insurance products that we and our affiliates issue. Rule 12b-1 fees and service fees paid out of Underlying Fund assets will reduce the amount of assets that otherwise would be available for investment, and reduce the Underlying Fund’s investment return. The dollar amount of asset-based payments we receive from the Underlying Funds is not set and will fluctuate over time depending on the Underlying Funds’ net asset value and the amount of assets invested.

Administrative, Marketing and Support Service Fees. We receive compensation of up to 0.70% annually based on assets under management from certain Trusts’ investment

advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof). These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment advisor realizes on the investment management fees deducted from assets of the Underlying Funds or wholly from the assets of the Underlying Funds. Contract Owners, through their indirect investment in the Trusts, bear the costs of these investment management fees, which in turn will reduce the return on your investment. The payments we receive are generally based on assets under management from certain Trusts’ investment advisors or their affiliates and vary by Trust. Some investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) pay us more than others. The amount may be significant.

Other Payments. Certain investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) may help offset the costs we incur for marketing activities and training to support sales of the Underlying Funds in the contract. These amounts are paid voluntarily and may provide such advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors access to national and regional sales conferences attended by our employees and registered representatives. The amounts paid depend on the nature of the meetings, the number of meetings attended, the costs expected to be incurred and the level of the advisor’s, subadvisor’s or distributor’s participation.

In addition, we (and our affiliates) may receive occasional gifts, entertainment or other compensation as an incentive to market the Underlying Funds and to cooperate with their marketing efforts. As a result of these payments, the investment advisors, subadvisors and/or distributors (or affiliates thereof) may benefit from increased access to our wholesalers and to our affiliates involved in the distribution of the contract.

Annuity Income Options

The Income Phase

What is the Income Phase?

During the Income Phase, we use the money accumulated in your contract to make regular payments to you. This is known as “annuitizing” your contract. At this point, the Accumulation Phase ends. You will no longer be able to take withdrawals of contract value and all other features and benefits of your contract will terminate, including your ability to surrender your contract.

Beginning the Income Phase is an important event. You have different options available to you. You should discuss your options with your financial representative and/or tax adviser so that together you may make the best decision for your particular circumstances.

When does the Income Phase begin?

Generally, you can annuitize your contract any time after your second contract anniversary (“Annuity Date”) and on or before the Latest Annuity Date, defined below, by completing and mailing the Annuity Option Selection Form to our Annuity Service Center.

If you do not request to annuitize your contract on the Annuity Date of your choice, your contract will be

annuitized on the Latest Annuity Date. Your Latest Annuity Date is defined as the later of the first NYSE business day of the month following your 95th birthday or 10 years after your contract issue date, whichever is later. If your contract is jointly owned, the Latest Annuity Date is based on the older Owner’s date of birth.

How do I elect to begin the Income Phase?

You must select one of the annuity income payment options, listed below, that best meets your needs by mailing a completed Annuity Option Selection Form to our Annuity Service Center. If you do not select an annuity income payment option, your contract will be annuitized in accordance with the default annuity income payment option specified under Annuity Income Options below.

What is the impact on the living and death benefits if I annuitize?

If you annuitize, you may choose to take annuity income payments or withdrawals under your Living Benefit. Prior to annuitizing, you should seek advice on whether taking annuity income payments under the contract or guaranteed withdrawals under a Living Benefit are more advantageous to you. Upon annuitizing the contract, the death benefit will terminate. If your contract value is reduced to zero prior to annuitization as a result of receiving guaranteed withdrawals under the Living Benefit, you will receive your Protected Income Payment under the Living Benefit. Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS and DEATH BENEFITS above.

Annuity Income Options

You must send a written request to our Annuity Service Center to select an annuity income option. Once you begin receiving annuity income payments, you cannot change your annuity income option. If you elect to receive annuity income payments but do not select an annuity income option, your annuity income payments shall be in accordance with Option 4 for a period of 10 years; for annuity income payments based on joint lives, the default is Option 3 for a period of 10 years. Generally, the amount of each annuity income payment will be less with greater frequency of payments or if you chose a longer period certain guarantee.

We base our calculation of annuity income payments on the life expectancy of the Annuitant and the annuity rates set forth in your contract. In most contracts, the Owner and Annuitant are the same person. The Owner may change the Annuitant if different from the Owner at any time prior to the Annuity Date. The Owner must notify us if the Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date and designate a new Annuitant. If we do not receive a new Annuitant election, the Owner may not select an annuity income option based on the life of the Annuitant.

If the contract is owned by a non-natural Owner, the Annuitant cannot be changed after the contract has been issued and the death of the Annuitant will trigger the payment of the death benefit.

If you elect a lifetime based annuity income option without a guaranteed period, your annuity income payments depend on longevity only. That means that you may potentially not live long enough to receive an annuity income payment. If you

die before the first annuity income payment, no annuity income payments will be made.

Annuity Income Option 1 – Life Income Annuity

This option provides annuity income payments for the life of the Annuitant. Annuity income payments end when the Annuitant dies.

Annuity Income Option 2 – Joint and Survivor Life Income Annuity

This option provides annuity income payments for the life of the Annuitant and for the life of another designated person. Upon the death of either person, we will continue to make annuity income payments during the lifetime of the survivor. Annuity income payments end when the survivor dies. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances, the survivor’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.

Annuity Income Option 3 – Joint and Survivor Life Income Annuity with 10 or 20 Years Guaranteed

This option is similar to Option 2 above, with an additional guarantee of payments for at least 10 or 20 years, depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant and the survivor die before all of the guaranteed annuity income payments have been made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments greater than 10 years may not be available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances the survivor's annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.

Annuity Income Option 4 – Life Income Annuity with 10 or 20 Years Guaranteed

This option is similar to income Option 1 above with an additional guarantee of payments for at least 10 or 20 years, depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant dies before all guaranteed annuity income payments are made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments greater than 10 years may not be available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances the Beneficiary’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code.

Annuity Income Option 5 – Income for a Specified Period

This option provides annuity income payments for a guaranteed period ranging from 5 to 30 years, depending on the period chosen. If the Annuitant dies before all the guaranteed annuity income payments are made, the remaining annuity income payments are made to the Beneficiary under your contract. A guarantee of payments for more than 10 years may not be available to all Beneficiaries. For Qualified contracts, under certain circumstances the Beneficiary’s annuity income payments may be limited based on the Internal Revenue Code. Additionally, if variable annuity income payments are elected under this option, you (or the Beneficiary under the contract if the Annuitant dies prior to all guaranteed annuity income payments being made) may redeem any remaining guaranteed variable annuity income payments after the

Annuity Date. Upon your request, the contract may be commuted if a period certain annuitization income option has been elected. The amount available upon such redemption would be the discounted present value of any remaining guaranteed annuity income payments that would reflect the fluctuating trading costs for liquidating the securities in place to pay for these contractual obligations. The detrimental impact depends on the nature of the securities (and which may include short-term, medium term, and/or long-term investments) resulting in varying losses to the Company.

The value of an Annuity Unit, regardless of the option chosen, takes into account Base Contract Expense which includes a mortality and expense risk charge. Since Option 5 does not contain an element of mortality risk, no benefit is derived from this charge.

Please see the Statement of Additional Information for a more detailed discussion of the annuity income options.

Please see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS above for annuity income options available under the Living Benefits.

Fixed or Variable Annuity Income Payments

You can choose annuity income payments that are fixed, variable or both. Unless otherwise elected, if at the date when annuity income payments begin you are invested in the Variable Portfolios only, your annuity income payments will be variable and if your money is only in Fixed Accounts at that time, your annuity income payments will be fixed in amount. Further, if you are invested in both Fixed Accounts and Variable Portfolios when annuity income payments begin, your payments will be fixed and variable, unless otherwise elected. If annuity income payments are fixed, the Company guarantees the amount of each payment. If the annuity income payments are variable, the amount is not guaranteed and may fluctuate as described under ANNUITY INCOME PAYMENTS below.

Annuity Income Payments

We make annuity income payments on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis as elected by you. You instruct us to send you a check or to have the payments directly deposited into your bank account. If state law allows, we distribute annuities with a contract value of $5,000 or less in a lump sum. Also, if state law allows and the selected annuity income option results in annuity income payments of less than $50 per payment, we may decrease the frequency of payments.

If you are invested in the Variable Portfolios after the Annuity Date, your annuity income payments vary depending on the following:

•

for life income options, your age when annuity income payments begin; and

•

the contract value attributable to the Variable Portfolios on the Annuity Date; and

•

the 3.5% assumed investment rate used in the annuity table for the contract; and

•

the performance of the Variable Portfolios in which you are invested during the time you receive annuity income payments.

If you are invested in both the Fixed Accounts and the Variable Portfolios after the Annuity Date, the allocation of funds between the Fixed Accounts and Variable Portfolios also impacts the amount of your annuity income payments.

The value of fixed annuity income payments, if elected, will not be less than 1%. The value of variable annuity income payments, if elected, is based on an assumed interest rate (“AIR”) of 3.5% compounded annually. Variable annuity income payments generally increase or decrease from one annuity income payment date to the next based upon the performance of the applicable Variable Portfolios. If the performance of the Variable Portfolios selected is equal to the AIR, the annuity income payments will remain constant. If performance of Variable Portfolios is greater than the AIR, the annuity income payments will increase and if it is less than the AIR, the annuity income payments will decline.

Deferment of Payments

We may defer making fixed payments for up to six months, or less if required by law. Interest is credited to you during the deferral period. Please see ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY above for a discussion of when payments from

a Variable Portfolio may be suspended or postponed.

Taxes

The federal income tax treatment of annuity contracts or retirement programs is complex and sometimes uncertain. The discussion below is intended for general informational purposes only and is not intended as tax advice, either general or individualized, nor should be interpreted as providing any predictions or guarantees of a particular tax treatment. This discussion is based upon the Company’s understanding of current tax rules and interpretations. Finally, this discussion does not address all federal income tax consequences of transactions (including consequences of sales to foreign individuals or entities), state or local tax consequences, estate or gift tax consequences, or the impact of foreign tax laws, associated with your contract.

Tax laws are subject to legislative modification, and while many such modifications will have only a prospective application, it is important to recognize that a change could have a retroactive effect as well. As a result, you should consult a tax adviser about the application of tax rules found in the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (“IRC” or “the Code”), Treasury Regulations, applicable Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) guidance, and any regulatory developments to your individual situation. We do not guarantee the tax status or treatment of your annuity contract.

Tax rules vary, depending on whether the contract is offered under your employer-sponsored retirement program or arrangement, an individual retirement account or annuity (a Qualified contract), or a Non-Qualified contract.

The contracts are used under many types of retirement arrangements, including the following:

•

IRC section 403(b) annuities for employees of public schools, community colleges, colleges and universities, and other section 501(c)(3) tax-exempt organizations;

•

IRC section 401(a), 403(a), and 401(k) qualified plans (including plans for self-employed individuals);

•

IRC section 408(b) traditional IRAs;

•

IRC section 408A Roth IRAs;

•

IRC section 457 deferred compensation plans of governmental and certain tax-exempt employers;

•

IRC section 408(k) SEPs and SARSEPs; and

•

IRC section 408(p) SIMPLE retirement accounts.

Contracts purchased under these retirement arrangements described above (“Qualified Arrangement”) generally are referred to in this prospectus as “Qualified contracts.” Contracts that are not purchased in connection with a Qualified Arrangement generally are referred to in this prospectus as “Non-Qualified contracts.” Note that there are certain types of plans that are referred to as non-qualified, e.g. non-qualified deferred compensation plans under IRC section 457, that, for purposes of this prospectus, are considered Qualified Arrangements. See below for further details.

Non-Qualified Contracts

Tax Status of Non-Qualified Contracts

In General

Generally, the increases in the value of a contract are not taxed until a distribution occurs. The taxable portion of the distribution is taxed at ordinary income tax rates. However, this tax deferral is only available if the contract satisfies certain federal tax rules and requirements, described next. We do not guarantee the tax status or treatment of your contract. The remainder of the discussion assumes that the contract will be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes.

Late Annuity Start Date

If the contract’s annuity start date occurs (or is scheduled to occur) at a time when the Owner has reached an advanced age, it is possible that the contract would not be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes. In that event, the income and gains under the contract could be currently includable in the Owner’s income.

Diversification

For a contract to be treated as a variable annuity for federal income tax purposes, the underlying investments under the variable annuity must be “adequately diversified”. Treasury Regulations provide standards that must be met to comply with the rules. Under the regulations, an investment

portfolio will be deemed adequately diversified if (1) no more than 55% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any one investment; (2) no more than 70% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any two investments; (3) no more than 80% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any three investments; and (4) no more than 90% of the value of the total assets of the portfolio is represented by any four investments.

If the variable annuity fails to comply with these diversification standards, you could be required to pay tax currently on the excess of the contract value over the contract Purchase Payments. We expect that the manager of the Underlying Funds monitors the Underlying Funds to comply with these Treasury Regulations.

Investor Control

Under certain circumstances, you, and not the Company, could be treated as the owner of the assets held in the Separate Account under your Non-Qualified contract, based on the degree of control you exercise over the underlying investments. If this occurs, you may be currently taxed on income and gains attributable to the assets under the contract rather than at the time of withdrawal.

There is little guidance in this area, and the determination of whether you possess sufficient incidents of ownership over such assets depends on all of the relevant facts and circumstances. However, Revenue Rulings 2003-91 and 2003-92 provide that an annuity owner’s ability to choose among general investment strategies either at the time of the initial purchase or thereafter, does not constitute control sufficient to cause the contract holder to be treated as the owner of such assets. The Revenue Rulings provide that if, based on all the facts and circumstances, you do not have direct or indirect control over such assets, then you do not possess sufficient incidents of ownership over the assets supporting the annuity to be deemed the owner of the assets for federal income tax purposes. We do not know what limits may be set by the IRS in any future guidance that it may issue and whether such limits will apply to existing contracts.

While we believe the contract does not give you investor control over such assets, we reserve the right to modify the contract as necessary to prevent you from being considered as the owner of the assets of the contract for purposes of the Code.

Non-Natural Owners

A trust or corporation or other Owner that is not a natural person (“Non-Natural Owner”) should consult a tax adviser. Generally, the Code does not confer tax-deferred status upon a Non-Qualified contract owned by a Non-Natural Owner for federal income tax purposes. Instead in such cases, the Non-Natural Owner pays tax each year on the contract’s “income on the contract” (as defined in the tax law). However, certain exceptions may apply, such as for

contracts held by a trust or other entity as an agent for a natural person or contracts held by certain employer sponsored retirement arrangements. If an exception applies, the entity’s general interest deduction under the Code may be limited. Finally, certain non-qualified deferred compensation plans are subject to special tax rules. Please consult a tax advisor if you are a Non-Natural Owner of a contract.

Tax Treatment of Purchase Payments

Purchase Payments paid to a Non-Qualified contract are neither excludible from the gross income of the contract Owner nor deductible for tax purposes. In general, your cost basis in a Non-Qualified contract is equal to the Purchase Payments you put into the contract less any amounts previously received from the contract that were not includible in income.

Tax Treatment of Distributions

Partial Withdrawals

If you make a partial withdrawal from a Non-Qualified contract, the IRC generally treats such withdrawals as taxable to the extent your contract value before the withdrawal (determined before the application of any surrender charge) exceeds your cost basis. Partial withdrawals from a Non-Qualified contract that has Purchase Payments made before August 14, 1982, are an important exception to this general rule and are treated as first coming from the pre-August 14, 1982 Purchase Payments.

Amounts received under an automatic withdrawal plan are treated as withdrawals and not annuity payments for purposes of calculating taxable income.

Optional Living Benefits/Other Benefits

Generally, we will treat amounts credited to the contract value under the optional Living Benefit guarantees, for income tax purposes, as earnings in the contract. Thus, payments of Living Benefits are treated as taxable withdrawals to the extent there are taxable gains in the contract value. Payments in accordance with such guarantees after the contract value has been reduced to zero may be treated for tax purposes as amounts received as an annuity, if the other requirements for such treatment are satisfied. All payments or withdrawals after cost basis has been reduced to zero, whether or not under such a guarantee, will be treated as taxable amounts. If available and you elect an optional Living Benefit, the application of certain tax rules, including those rules relating to distributions from your contract, are not entirely clear. Such benefits are not intended to adversely affect the tax treatment of distributions or of the contract. However, you should be aware that little guidance is available. You should consult a tax adviser before electing an optional Living Benefit.

Full Surrenders

In the case of a full surrender of a Non-Qualified contract, the amount received on surrender is taxable to the extent it exceeds the cost basis.

Assignments and Gratuitous Transfers

If you transfer ownership of your Non-Qualified contract to a person other than your spouse (or former spouse incident to a divorce) you will owe federal income tax on the contract’s cash surrender value to the extent it exceeds your cost basis. The transferee’s cost basis will be increased to reflect the amount the transferor includes in income.

An assignment or pledge (or agreement to assign or pledge) of any portion of a Non-Qualified contract will be treated as a withdrawal. If the entire contract value is assigned or pledged, subsequent increases in the contract value are also treated as withdrawals for as long as the assignment or pledge remains in place. The cost basis is increased by the amount included in income with respect to such assignment or pledge.

Aggregation Rule

If you purchase multiple non-qualified annuity contracts from the same insurance company (or its affiliates), within the same calendar year, the IRS generally requires these annuity contracts to be aggregated and treated as a single contract for purposes of determining the taxable income associated with any distribution taken from the contracts for tax purposes. For purposes of this rule, contracts received in a Section 1035 exchange will be considered issued in the year of the exchange. (However, the contracts may be treated as issued on the issue date of the contract being exchanged, for certain purposes, including determining whether the contract is an immediate annuity contract.) Aggregation impacts the amount of the distributions described above that is subject to taxation (and potentially subject to the 10% additional tax, if applicable). Owners should seek their own tax advice if you are purchasing more than one annuity from the same insurance company (or its affiliates) in the same calendar year.

Annuity Payments

If you annuitize your Non-Qualified contract, a portion of each annuity income payment will be considered, for tax purposes, to be a return of a portion of your cost basis. The portion of each annuity income payment that is considered a return of your cost basis will not be taxed. Your annuity income payment will be considered fully taxable after you have received a return of the entire amount of your cost basis.

Death Benefits

The taxable amount of any death benefits paid under the contract are taxable to the Beneficiary. The rules governing the taxation of payments from a Non-Qualified annuity contract, as discussed above, generally apply whether the

death benefit is paid as lump sum or annuity income payments. Estate taxes may also apply.

Enhanced death benefits (if applicable to your contract) are used as investment protection and are not expected to give rise to any adverse tax effects. However, the IRS could take the position that some or all the charges for these death benefits should be treated as a partial withdrawal from the contract. In that case, the amount of the partial withdrawal may be includible in taxable income and subject to the 10% additional tax if the Owner is under 59½, unless another exception applies. You should consult your tax adviser regarding these features and benefits prior to purchasing a contract.

Upon death, any remaining amounts in the contract must be distributed in accordance with the requirements under the Code. For deaths that occur after the contract’s annuity start date, payments under the annuity option elected will continue to be paid at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect at such Owner’s death. For deaths that occur prior to the contract’s annuity start date, the entire interest in the contract can be paid in one of the following manner:

Lump sum payment of the death benefit.

Payment of the entire death benefit within five years of the date of any Owner’s death.

Payment of the death benefit over the lifetime of the Beneficiary or over a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of the Beneficiary. Under this option, distributions must begin within one year of the date of any Owner’s death. Note - This option is not available for a Beneficiary that is a non-natural person.

Spousal Option Only. The spousal Beneficiary can elect to treat the annuity contract as their own.

Special rules apply if the Owner is a non-natural person, where the annuitant is generally treated as the Owner.

10% Additional Tax

The taxable portion of any distribution, whether annuity income payment or other withdrawal, prior to the Owner reaching age 59½ is subject to a 10% additional tax unless an exception applies. Some of the main exceptions include:

•

when paid to your Beneficiary after you die;

•

after you become permanently disabled (as defined in the IRC);

•

when paid as a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated Beneficiary;

•

under an immediate annuity contract; or

•

when attributable to Purchase Payments made prior to August 14, 1982.

Other exceptions may available depending on contract type and your circumstances. Please consult your tax advisor or www.irs.gov for more information.

Net Investment Income Tax

There is a 3.8% tax on net investment income for Owners with Modified Adjusted Gross Income (“MAGI”) that exceeds certain thresholds based on the type of filer. Further information may be found on www.irs.gov. For this purpose, net investment income generally will include taxable distributions from a Non-Qualified contract. It is also possible the tax could apply to other taxable amounts relating to your Non-Qualified contract. Please consult your tax advisor. This tax generally does not apply to Qualified contracts; however, taxable distributions from such contracts may be considered in determining the MAGI threshold.

Tax Treatment of Exchanges

The Non-Qualified contract may be issued in exchange for all or part of another annuity contract that you own. In addition, the contract Owner may be permitted to exchange the contract for a new annuity contract prior to the commencement of annuity income payments. A full or partial exchange of one annuity contract for another is a tax-free transaction under IRC section 1035, provided that the requirements of that section are satisfied. Please note that the exchange may be tax reportable. If you exchange part of an existing annuity contract for another annuity contract, and within 180 days of the exchange you receive a distribution other than certain annuity payments, the exchange may not be tax free. You should consult a tax advisor when exchanging part or all of an annuity contract.

Qualified Contracts

In General

Qualified contracts taxation varies with the type of plan and terms and conditions of each specific plan. You will get no additional tax advantage from this contract if you are investing through a Qualified contract beyond the treatment provided to alternative qualifying arrangements such as trusts or custodial accounts. However, in both cases the contract offers features and benefits that other investments may not offer. You and your financial representative should carefully consider whether the features and benefits, including the investment options, lifetime annuity income options, protection through Living Benefits, death benefits and other benefits provided under an annuity contract issued in connection with a Qualified contract are suitable for your needs and objectives and are appropriate in light of the expense.

The terms of the plan may limit the rights otherwise available under the contracts. The Code and, if applicable, your contract or Qualified Arrangement, may have limitations and restrictions such as: the amount that can be contributed; the form, manner and timing of distributions; vesting and non-forfeitability of interests; nondiscrimination

in eligibility and participation; and the tax treatment of distributions, withdrawals and surrenders. Some of these limitations are adjusted annually. Please see www.IRS.gov or consult your tax advisor.

The following are general summary descriptions of the types of Qualified Arrangements with which the Qualified contracts may be used. Not all plan types will be available under your contract. Descriptions of such arrangements are not exhaustive and are for general information purposes only. The tax rules regarding Qualified Arrangements are very complex and will have differing applications depending on individual facts and circumstances. Each prospective purchaser should obtain competent tax advice prior to purchasing a contract issued under a qualified plan.

Note that the Company no longer issues new Qualified contracts other than IRAs, SEP IRAs, or ROTH IRAs.

Plans of Self-Employed Individuals: “H.R. 10 Plans”

Section 401 of the Code permits self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans for themselves and their employees, commonly referred to as “H.R. 10” or “Keogh” Plans.

Pension and Profit Sharing Plans 401(a)/401(k)

The Code permits certain employers to establish various types of retirement plans, including 401(k) plans, for employees. These retirement plans may permit the purchase of the Qualified contracts to provide benefits under the plan. Contributions to the contracts will be restricted by the Code and the terms of the plan.

Tax-Sheltered Annuity (403(b))

Section 403(b) of the Code permits the purchase of “tax-sheltered annuities” by public educational institutions and tax-exempt organizations described in Section 501(c)(3) of the Code.

Treasury regulations include several rules and requirements, such as a requirement that employers maintain their 403(b) plans pursuant to a written plan. The regulations, subsequent IRS guidance, and the terms of the written plan may impose restrictions on both new and existing Qualified contracts, including restrictions on the availability of loans, distributions, transfers and exchanges, regardless of when a contract was purchased.

In general, certain contracts originally established by a IRS Revenue Ruling 90-24 transfer prior to September 25, 2007 are exempt (or grandfathered) from some of the requirements of the regulations; provided that no salary reduction or other contributions have ever been made to the contract, and that no additional transfers are made to the contract on or after September 24, 2007.

Effective January 1, 2009 the Company no longer accepts new Purchase Payments (including contributions, transfers and exchanges) into new or existing 403(b) annuities.

Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities (IRA), SEP IRA, or Roth IRA

The IRA Disclosure Statement, ROTH IRA Disclosure Statement, or Traditional, SEP, and Roth Individual Retirement Annuity (IRA) Combined Disclosure Statement which was received at the time of original issue of your IRA, SEP IRA or Roth IRA contains information about eligibility, contribution limits, distribution restrictions and other tax information. For further information about contributions and distributions from your IRA, please see Publications 590-A and 590-B on the IRS website at www.irs.gov.

Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities

Section 408(b) of the Code permits eligible individuals to contribute to an individual retirement program known as a traditional IRA. Under applicable limitations, certain amounts (adjusted annually) may be contributed to an IRA. Such contributions may be deductible, depending on your modified gross income.

Roth IRAs

Section 408A of the Code permits an individual to contribute to an individual retirement account called a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but distributions are tax-free if certain requirements are satisfied. Unlike traditional IRAs, to which everyone can contribute even if they cannot deduct the full contribution, Roth IRAs have income limitations on who can make regular cash contributions.

Simplified Employee Pension Plan (“SEP”) IRA

Sole proprietors, partnerships, and corporations, including S corporations, can set up SEPs. Employer contributions under a SEP are made to a separate IRAs established for each participating employee, and generally must be made at a rate representing a uniform percent of participating employees’ compensation. Through 1996, employees of certain small employers (other than tax-exempt organizations) were permitted to establish plans allowing employees to contribute pretax, on a salary reduction basis, to the SEP (known as SARSEPs).

Deferred Compensation Plans — Section 457

A unit of a state or local government may establish a deferred compensation program for individuals who perform services for the government unit if permitted by applicable state (and/or local) laws. In addition, a non-governmental tax-exempt employer may establish a deferred compensation program for individuals who: (i) perform services for the employer, and (ii) belong to either a select group of management or highly compensated employees or, if provided under the deferred compensation arrangement, independent contractors.

The employer uses deferred amounts to purchase the contracts offered by this prospectus. For plans maintained by a unit of a state or local government, the contract is generally held for the exclusive benefit of plan Participants. For plans of non-governmental tax-exempt employers, the employee has no present ownership rights in the Contract

and is entitled to payment only in accordance with the eligible deferred compensation plan (an “EDCP”) provisions and, where applicable, any trust under which the contract may be held. Non-governmental 457 plan assets must remain assets of the employer and are subject to claims by the creditors of the employer.

Under these plans, contributions made for the benefit of the employees will not be includible in the employees’ gross income until distributed from, or if a non-governmental tax-exempt employer, otherwise made available to the recipient.

Tax Treatment of Purchase Payments

For employer-sponsored arrangements, Purchase Payments under Qualified contracts can be made as contributions by employers or as pre-tax or after-tax contributions by employees, depending on the type of retirement program. For IRAs, Purchase Payments also can be made as a pre-tax or after-tax contribution. If you make contributions on a pre-tax basis, then you have no cost basis in your contract. However, you normally will have cost basis in a Roth IRA, a designated Roth account in a 403(b), 401(k), or governmental 457(b) plan, and you may have cost basis in a non-deductible traditional IRA or in another Qualified contract.

Limitations and restrictions may apply to Purchase Payments. Please refer to www.IRS.gov for further information, as these limitations and restrictions may be based on several factors.

Various penalty and excise taxes may apply to contributions made in violation of applicable contribution limits. You should consult a qualified tax advisor associated with any questions related to the contribution to or transfer from an employer sponsored retirement plan or arrangement, IRA, or Roth IRA.

Tax Treatment of Distributions

Distributions from Qualified contracts, other than IRAs and Roth IRAs, are often limited by the IRC and by the terms of the employer-sponsored retirement plan. In some cases, distributions are not available unless there has been a distributable event as defined by the terms of the plan. All distributions are tax at ordinary income tax rates. Various penalty taxes may apply to distributions made in violation of applicable requirements. Furthermore, certain contractual withdrawal penalties and restrictions may apply to surrenders from Qualified contracts. You should consult a qualified tax advisor associated with any questions related to the distribution or transfer from an employer sponsored retirement plan or arrangement, IRA, or Roth IRA.

Non-Roth Qualified Contracts. Distributions from Qualified contracts other than Roth IRAs and designated Roth accounts (described below) are taxable, except to the extent allocable to after-tax contributions or non-deductible traditional IRA contributions.

Roth IRAs and Designated Roth Accounts. “Qualified” distributions from Roth IRAs and Designated Roth Accounts upon attainment of age 59½, upon death or disability, or for qualifying first-time homebuyer expenses (Roth IRAs only) are tax-free as long as five or more years have passed since the first contribution to the taxpayer’s first Roth IRA or Designated Roth Account. Qualified distributions may be subject to state income tax in some states. Special tax rules will apply to distributions that are not qualified and such distributions are generally subject to the same 10% additional tax on amounts included in income as for other IRAs. Distributions of rollover or conversion contributions may be subject to a 10% additional tax if the distribution of those contributions is made within five years of the rollover or conversion.

Designated Roth and Roth IRA Conversions. All persons may be eligible to convert a distribution from an employer-sponsored plan or from a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA. Conversions from qualified contracts into Roth IRAs normally require taxes to be paid in the year of the conversion on any previously untaxed amounts included in the amount converted. The taxable value of such a conversion may consider the value of certain benefits under the contract.

457 Plans.Amounts received from an EDCP are includible in gross income for the taxable year in which they are paid or, if a non-governmental tax-exempt employer, otherwise made available to the recipient.

Annuitization. If you annuitize your Qualified contract, special tax rules apply to determine the taxable amount of your annuity income payment depending on your Qualified Arrangement. Please consult your tax advisor.

10% Additional Tax. You should consult your tax adviser as to the availability of an exemption from, or reduction of, such tax under an applicable income tax treaty, if any. The taxable portion of any distribution, whether annuity income payment or other withdrawal, prior to the Owner of a Qualified contract reaching age 59½ is subject to a 10% additional tax unless an exception applies. Some of the main exceptions include:

•

when paid to your Beneficiary after you die;

•

after you become permanently disabled (as defined in the IRC); and

•

as a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint expectancies) of you and your designated Beneficiary.

Other exceptions may be applicable under certain circumstances. In addition, you may be able to repay certain distributions if certain requirements are satisfied. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA within two years after first participating in the Plan may be subject to a 25% additional tax, rather than a 10% additional tax.

Direct and Indirect Rollovers

A rollover distribution, including eligible rollover distributions as defined below, from an IRA, 403(b) TSA, qualified plan or governmental 457(b) deferred compensation plan may generally be rolled over into another IRA, 403(b) TSA, qualified plan or governmental 457(b) deferred compensation plan, if permitted by the plan.

An eligible rollover distribution is the taxable portion of any amount received by a covered employee from a retirement plan qualified under Sections 401(a) or 403(a) or, if from a plan of a governmental employer, under Section 457(b) of the Code, or from a tax-sheltered annuity qualified under Section 403(b) of the Code. Generally, certain types of distributions are not considered eligible rollover distributions, such as distributions received on account of:

a required minimum distribution,

a hardship withdrawal, or

a series of substantially equal payments (at least annually) made over your life expectancy or the joint life expectancies of you and your designated Beneficiary, or a distribution made for a specified period of 10 years or more.

A rollover distribution (including an eligible rollover distribution) may be transferred as a direct or indirect rollover. In a direct rollover, the funds are directly transferred from one Qualified Arrangement to another. In an indirect rollover, the individual receives a distribution from the Qualified Arrangement and reinvests it in another Qualified Arrangement within 60 days of the distribution. For indirect rollovers, you must include in your income for the year the taxable amount of any portion of the distribution that you do not roll over. An indirect rollover of an eligible rollover distribution will be subject to a mandatory 20% withholding tax (described below).

Individuals are only permitted to make one indirect rollover from an IRA to another IRA in any one-year period. It is important to note that the one rollover per year limitation does not apply to amounts taken as an eligible rollover distribution from an employer sponsored retirement arrangement or from amounts transferred directly between IRAs in a trustee-to-trustee transfer.

Funds may generally be rolled over tax-free from a SIMPLE IRA to another IRA. However, during the two-year period beginning on the date you first participate in any SIMPLE IRA plan of your employer, SIMPLE IRA funds may only be rolled to another SIMPLE IRA.

You should always consult your tax adviser before you move or attempt to move any funds.

Tax Treatment of Death Benefits

The taxable amount of any death benefits paid under the contract are taxable to the Beneficiary. The rules governing the taxation of payments from an annuity contract, as

discussed above, generally apply whether the death benefit is paid as lump sum or annuity income payments. Estate taxes may also apply.

Enhanced death benefits (if applicable to your contract) are used as investment protection and are not expected to give rise to any adverse tax effects. However, the IRS could take the position that some or all the charges for these death benefits should be treated as a partial withdrawal from the contract. In that case, the amount of the partial withdrawal may be includible in taxable income and subject to the 10% additional tax described above if the Owner is under 59½, unless another exception applies. The IRS may consider these benefits “incidental death benefits” or “life insurance.” You should consult your tax adviser regarding these features and benefits prior to purchasing a Qualified contract. See below for required distributions after the death of the Owner.

Required Minimum Distributions

Your required minimum distribution (RMD) is the minimum amount you must withdraw from your Qualified Arrangement each year after your required beginning date. The RMD rules do not apply to Roth IRAs or designated Roth accounts when the Owner is alive.

Failure to satisfy the minimum distribution requirements may result in an excise tax. A 25% excise tax may be assessed on any RMD that is required but not taken timely. However, if the late RMD is taken within a two-year period, the penalty may be reduced to 10% if certain conditions are satisfied. You should consult your tax adviser for more information.

Required Beginning Date

Generally, the IRC requires that you begin taking annual distributions from Qualified contracts by December 31 of the calendar year in which you attain the “applicable age”:

•

Age 75 if you were born January 1, 1960 or later.

•

Age 73 if you were born on or after January 1, 1951, and before January 1, 1960.

•

Age 72 if you were born on or after July 1, 1949, and before January 1, 1951.

•

Age 70 ½ if you were born before July 1, 1949.

For employer sponsored retirement plans, you must begin distributions on the later of (1) reaching the applicable age, or (2) the calendar year in which you sever employment from the employer sponsoring the plan.

You may choose to delay your first distribution until April 1 of the calendar year following in which you reach the applicable age or sever employment, as applicable. However, if you choose to delay your first distribution, you will be required to withdraw your second RMD on or before December 31 in that same year. For each year thereafter, you must withdraw your RMD by December 31.

For 403(b) contracts, amounts accumulated under a Contract on December 31, 1986, may be subject to special distribution rules.

Combining Distributions from Multiple Qualified Contracts

If you own more than one IRA, you may be permitted to take your RMD in any combination from your IRAs. A similar rule applies if you own more than one 403(b) account, unless the plan, contract, or account otherwise provides. However, you cannot satisfy this distribution requirement for your IRA contract by taking a distribution from a 403(b) account, and you cannot satisfy the requirement for your 403(b) account by taking a distribution from an IRA.

Automatic Withdrawal Option

If available, you may elect to have the RMD amount for your contract calculated and withdrawn each year under the automatic withdrawal option. You may select monthly, quarterly, semiannual, or annual withdrawals for this purpose. This service is provided as a courtesy, and we do not guarantee the accuracy of our calculations.

Impact of Optional Benefits

The annuity contract value used to determine RMDs includes the actuarial present value of other benefits under the Qualified contract, such as enhanced death benefits and/or Living Benefits. As a result, if you request a minimum distribution calculation, or if one is otherwise required to be provided, in those specific circumstances where this requirement applies, the calculation may be based upon a value that is greater than your contract value, resulting in a larger RMD. This does not apply to RMDs made under an irrevocable annuity income option.

We recommend you consult your tax adviser concerning your required minimum distribution.

Required After Death Distributions

Upon death, any remaining amounts in the Qualified contract must be distributed in accordance with the requirements under the IRC. The timing of these distributions will depend on whether the death occurs before the Owner was required to take RMDs, the type of Beneficiary, and the Beneficiary’s relationship to the deceased Owner. The information provided below applies to Owners who die after 2019 (after 2021 for certain governmental and collectively bargained retirement plans). For Owners’ deaths prior to such dates, individuals should consult a tax advisor regarding the applicable after-death distribution requirements.

Eligible designated Beneficiaries (“EDB”) are generally a natural person designated as a Beneficiary (“designated beneficiaries”) who are also:

•

the surviving spouse of the Owner; or

•

an individual who is not more than ten years younger than the Owner.

If the Beneficiary is an EDB, the entire amount in the contract generally must be paid to the EDB:

•

if the owner had not reached their required beginning date for RMDs

○

within 5 years after the owner’s death, or

○

by December 31st of the year following the year of death and be paid over the lifetime or single life expectancy of the EDB; or

•

if the owner had reached their required beginning date for RMDs, payments must continue at least as rapidly as was required for the Owner and all amounts must be distributed within 5 years of the owner’s death.

Exceptions to this rule may apply in the case of an EDB who is also the Owner’s spouse.

If a Beneficiary is a designated beneficiary, the entire amount in the Contract must be distributed either:

•

if the Owner had not reached their required beginning date for RMDs, within 5 years after the owner’s death, or

•

if the Owner had reached their required beginning date for RMDs, payments must continue at least as rapidly as was required for the Owner and all amounts must be distributed within 5 years of the owner’s death.

If the Beneficiary is not a designated beneficiary or an EDB, the Beneficiary must receive the entire amount in the contract:

•

if the Owner had not reached their required beginning date for RMDs, within 5 years after the owner’s death, or

•

if the Owner had reached their required beginning date for RMDs, payments must continue at least as rapidly as was required for the Owner.

Additional rules, requirements, and exceptions may apply. Please consult a tax advisor.

Gifts, Pledges, Assignments of and/or Loans from a Qualified Contract

Qualified contracts are prohibited from being transferred, assigned or pledged as security for a loan. This generally does not apply to loans under an employer-sponsored retirement plan (including loans from the annuity contract) that satisfy certain requirements, provided that the plan is not an unfunded deferred compensation plan. Another exception to this rule includes an assignment pursuant to a domestic relations order meeting the requirements of the plan or arrangement under which the contract is issued (for many plans, a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, or “QDRO”), or, in the case of an IRA, pursuant to a decree of divorce or separation maintenance or a written instrument incident to such decree.

For certain qualified arrangements, a default of a loan may be considered a taxable distribution and may be subject to a 10% additional tax if the distribution occurred prior to your attainment of age 59.5 unless an exception applies. Please see the terms of your loan for specifics regarding your loan and the tax impact of defaults.

You should consult a tax advisor as to the availability of these and any other exceptions.

Tax Withholding and Reporting

In General

Taxable amounts distributed from annuity contracts are subject to federal and state income tax reporting and withholding. In general, we will withhold federal income tax from the taxable portion of such distribution based on the type of distribution and, in certain cases, the amount of your distribution. An election out of federal withholding must be made in accordance with the IRS guidance as directed on forms that we provide. If an election out of withholding or election of another amount is not made, withholding is imposed (1) for periodic payments, at the rate that would be imposed if the payments were wages, and the payee was single with no adjustments, or (2) for other distributions, at the rate of 10%. If you are a U.S. person (which includes a resident alien), and your address of record is a non-U.S. address, we are required to withhold income tax unless payments are directed to your U.S. residential address. We are also required to withhold if you do not provide a valid TIN.

State income tax withholding rules vary, and we will withhold based on the rules of your state of residence. Your state may require any election associated with withholding to be undertaken on the state’s prescribed form.

Special tax rules apply to withholding for non-United States persons, and we generally withhold income tax for such non-United States persons at a rate of 30% of the taxable amount. A different withholding rate may be applicable to a non-United States person based on the terms of an existing income tax treaty between the United States and the non-United States person’s country. To qualify for any reduced withholding, the non-United States person must provide applicable certifications under Form W-8 BEN-E, Form W-8IMY, or other applicable form. Any Form W-8, including the Form W-8 BEN-E and Form W-8IMY, is only effective for three years from date of signature unless a change in circumstances makes any information on the form incorrect. You should consult your tax adviser as to the availability of an exemption from, or reduction of, such tax under an applicable income tax treaty, if any. Note, any payments made to a foreign entity, where such entity fails to provide the applicable certifications, may result in a 30% withholding on certain gross payments, which could include distributions from annuity contracts.

Any income tax withheld is a credit against your income tax liability. Regardless of the amount withheld by us, you are

liable for payment of federal and state income tax on the taxable portion of annuity distributions. You should consult with your tax adviser regarding the payment of the correct amount of these income taxes and potential liability if you fail to pay such taxes.

20% Federal Income Tax Withholding on Eligible Rollover Distributions

For certain qualified employer sponsored plans, we are required to withhold 20% of the taxable portion of your withdrawal that constitutes an eligible rollover distribution for federal income taxes. This requirement is mandatory and cannot be waived by the Owner. You may avoid withholding if you do a direct rollover between Qualified Arrangements.

Generation Skipping Transfer Tax Withholding

Under certain circumstances, the IRC may impose generation skipping transfer tax when all or a part of an annuity contract is transferred (including a death benefit paid) to an individual two or more generations younger than the owner. The Company may be required to undertake withholding associated with such a transaction. Contract Owners should consult a tax advisor with any questions.

Civil Unions and Domestic Partnerships

Parties to a state civil union or domestic partnership are not treated as married under federal law. Accordingly, certain transactions (such as a change of ownership or spousal continuation) may be taxable to those persons. Contract Owners should consult a tax advisor with any questions.

Our Taxes

The Company is taxed as a life insurance company under the Code. For federal income tax purposes, the Separate Account is not a separate entity from the Company and its operations form a part of the Company. We are entitled to certain tax benefits related to the investment of Company assets, including assets of the Separate Account, which may include foreign tax credits and the corporate dividends received deduction. These potential benefits are not passed back to you, since we are the owner of the assets from which tax benefits may be derived.

Other Information

The Distributor

Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302, distributes the contracts. Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., a wholly-owned subsidiary of AGL, is a registered broker-dealer under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”). No underwriting fees are retained by Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. in connection with the distribution of the contracts.

The Company

American General Life Insurance Company

American General Life Insurance Company (“AGL”) is a stock life insurance company organized under the laws of the state of Texas. Its home office is 2727-A Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas 77019-2191.

Contracts are issued by AGL in all states, except New York.

AGL is obligated to pay all amounts promised to investors under a contract issued by AGL.

Operation of the Company

The operations of the Company are influenced by many factors, including general economic conditions, monetary and fiscal policies of the federal government, and policies of state and other regulatory authorities. The level of sales of the Company’s financial and insurance products is influenced by many factors, including general market rates of interest, the strength, weakness and volatility of equity markets, terms and conditions of competing financial and insurance products and the relative value of such brands.

The Company is exposed to market risk, interest rate risk, contract Owner behavior risk and mortality/longevity risk. Market volatility may result in increased risks related to guaranteed death and Living Benefits on the Company’s financial and insurance products, as well as reduced fee income in the case of assets held in separate accounts, where applicable. These guaranteed benefits are sensitive to equity market and other conditions. The Company primarily uses capital market hedging strategies to help cover the risk of paying guaranteed Living Benefits in excess of account values as a result of significant downturns in equity markets or as a result of other factors. The Company has treaties to reinsure a portion of the guaranteed minimum income benefits and guaranteed death benefits for equity and mortality risk on some of its older contracts. Such risk mitigation may or may not reduce the volatility of net income and capital and surplus resulting from equity market volatility.

The Company is regulated for the benefit of contract Owners by the insurance regulator in its state of domicile; and also by all state insurance departments where it is licensed to conduct business. The Company is required by its regulators to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet its contractual obligations to contract Owners. Insurance regulations also require the Company to maintain additional surplus to protect against a financial impairment the amount of which is based on the risks inherent in the Company’s operations.

The Separate Account

Variable Separate Account is a separate account of AGL under Texas law. It may be used to support the contract and other variable annuity contracts, and used for other permitted purposes.

The Separate Account is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.

Purchase Payments you make that are allocated to the Variable Portfolios are invested in the Separate Account.

The Company owns the assets in the Separate Account and invests them on your behalf, according to your instructions. Purchase Payments invested in the Separate Account are not guaranteed and will fluctuate with the value of the Variable Portfolios you select. Therefore, you assume all of the investment risk for contract value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. These assets are kept separate from our General Account and may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business we may conduct. Additionally, income gains and losses (realized and unrealized) resulting from assets in the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to other income gains or losses of the Company.

You benefit from dividends received by the Separate Account through an increase in your unit value. The Company expects to benefit from these dividends through tax credits and corporate dividends received deductions; however, these corporate deductions are not passed back to the Separate Account or to contract Owners.

The General Account

Obligations that are paid out of the Company’s general account (“General Account”) include any amounts you have allocated to available Fixed Accounts and the Secure Value Account, including any interest credited thereon, and amounts owed under your contract for death and/or Living Benefits which are in excess of portions of contract value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. The obligations and guarantees under the contract are the sole responsibility of the Company. Therefore, payments of these obligations are subject to our financial strength and claims paying ability, and our long term ability to make such payments.

The General Account assets are invested in accordance with applicable state regulation. These assets are exposed to the typical risks normally associated with a portfolio of fixed income securities, namely interest rate, option, liquidity and credit risk. The Company manages its exposure to these risks by, among other things, closely monitoring and matching the duration and cash flows of its assets and liabilities, monitoring or limiting prepayment and extension risk in its portfolio, maintaining a large percentage of its portfolio in highly liquid securities and engaging in a disciplined process of underwriting, reviewing and monitoring credit risk. With respect to the Living Benefits available in your contract, we also manage interest rate and certain market risk through a hedging strategy in the portfolio and we may require that those who elect a Living Benefit allocate their Purchase Payments in accordance with specified investment parameters.

Financial Statements

The financial statements described below are important for you to consider. Information about how to obtain these financial statements is also provided below.

The Company and the Separate Account

The financial statements of the Company and the Separate Account are required to be provided because you must look to those entities directly to satisfy our obligations to you under the Contract.

Instructions to Obtain Financial Statements

The financial statements of the Company and Separate Account are included in the Statement of Additional Information and available on the Company’s website at www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses and on SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. You may also request a free copy of the Statement of Additional Information by following the instructions on the back page or by contacting our Annuity Service Center at:

Mailing Address:
Annuity Service Center
P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570
Telephone Number: (800) 445-7862

We encourage both existing and prospective contract Owners to read and understand the financial statements.

Administration

We are responsible for the administrative servicing of your contract. Please contact our Annuity Service Center at (800) 445-7862, if you have any comments, questions or service requests.

We send out transaction confirmations and quarterly statements. During the Accumulation Phase, you will receive confirmation of transactions for your contract. Transactions made pursuant to contractual or systematic agreements, such as dollar cost averaging, if available, may be confirmed quarterly. Purchase Payments received through the automatic payment plan may also be confirmed quarterly. For all other transactions, we send confirmations. It is your responsibility to review these documents carefully and notify our Annuity Service Center of any inaccuracies immediately. We investigate all inquiries. Depending on the facts and circumstances, we may retroactively adjust your contract, provided you notify us of your concern within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or quarterly statement. Any other adjustments we deem warranted are made as of the time we receive notice of the error.

Legal Proceedings

There are no pending legal proceedings affecting the Separate Account, the Company, or the principal underwriter. Various federal, state or other regulatory agencies may from time to time review, examine or inquire into the operations, practices and procedures of the Company, such as through financial examinations, subpoenas, investigations, market conduct exams or other regulatory inquiries. Based on the current status of pending regulatory examinations, investigations and inquiries involving the Company, the Company believes that none of these matters will have a material adverse effect on the ability of the principal underwriter to perform its contract with the Registrant or of the depositor to meet its obligations under the variable annuity contracts.

Various lawsuits against the Company have arisen in the ordinary course of business. As of the date of this prospectus, the Company believes that none of these matters will have a material adverse effect on the ability of the principal underwriter to perform its contract with the Registrant or of the depositor to meet its obligations under the variable annuity contracts.

Registration Statements

Registration statements under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, related to the contracts offered by this prospectus are on file with the SEC. This prospectus does not contain all of the information contained in the registration statements and exhibits. For further information regarding the Separate Account, the Company and its General Account, the Variable Portfolios and the contract, please refer to the registration statements and exhibits.

Appendix A – Investment Options Available Under The Contract

Underlying Funds

The following is a list of Underlying Funds available under the contract. More information about the Underlying Funds is available in the prospectuses for the Underlying Funds, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses. You can also request this information at no cost by calling (855) 421-2692. Depending on the optional benefits you choose, you may not be able to invest in certain Underlying Funds. See “Investment Requirements For Optional Living Benefits” in this appendix.

The current expenses and performance information below reflect fees and expenses of the Underlying Funds, but do not reflect the other fees and expenses that your contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these other charges were included. Each Underlying Fund’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance.

Type	Underlying Fund – Share Class Advisor Subadvisor (if applicable)	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2025)
Type		Current Expenses	1 Year	5 Year	10 Year
Asset Allocation	Franklin Allocation VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc.	0.82%*	12.60%	5.73%	7.32%
	Franklin Income VIP Fund – Class 2 Franklin Advisers, Inc.	0.72%	12.56%	7.66%	7.30%
	SA Allocation Aggressive Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC	1.03%*	15.84%	8.05%	9.34%
	SA Allocation Balanced Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC	1.00%*	10.96%	3.91%	5.79%
	SA Allocation Moderate Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC	1.01%*	12.52%	5.48%	7.20%
	SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC	1.01%*	14.13%	6.52%	8.07%
	SA American Funds Asset Allocation Portfolio1 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Capital Research and Management Company	0.80%*	15.57%	8.70%	9.48%
	SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.	0.99%*	12.65%	5.80%	7.27%
	SA MFS Total Return Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company	0.96%	10.69%	6.03%	7.26%
Bond	SA American Century Inflation Managed Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC American Century Investment Management, Inc.	0.85%	6.21%	0.63%	2.06%
	SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Federated Investment Management Company	0.80%	6.78%	0.15%	3.46%
	SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond Portfolio2 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Goldman Sachs Asset Management L.P.2	0.84%	6.31%	-1.02%	1.21%
	SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc. and Massachusetts Financial Services Company	0.78%*	6.98%	-0.17%	2.19%
	SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.	0.80%	4.39%	2.20%	1.45%
	SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Pacific Investment Management Company, LLC	1.18%*	8.72%	-3.61%	0.35%

A-1

Type	Underlying Fund – Share Class Advisor Subadvisor (if applicable)	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2025)
Type		Current Expenses	1 Year	5 Year	10 Year
Bond (continued)	SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC PineBridge Investments, LLC	1.01%	8.16%	5.05%	6.94%
Cash	Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market Fund – Service Shares Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.	0.43%*	3.94%	2.98%	1.90%
Stock	Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc.	1.10%	11.39%	10.08%	14.58%
	Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc.	1.00%	17.14%	15.14%	11.67%
	Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund – Series II Invesco Advisers, Inc.	1.00%	15.30%	12.56%	10.46%
	Lord Abbett Growth and Income Portfolio – Class VC Lord, Abbett & Co. LLC	0.93%	17.29%	13.35%	11.12%
	SA AB Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC AllianceBernstein L.P.	0.88%	12.79%	11.67%	15.85%
	SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC AllianceBernstein L.P.	1.16%*	2.32%	8.36%	8.27%
	SA American Funds Global Growth Portfolio1 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Capital Research and Management Company	0.95%*	21.35%	7.94%	11.86%
	SA American Funds Growth Portfolio1 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Capital Research and Management Company	0.85%*	19.91%	13.07%	17.65%
	SA American Funds Growth-Income Portfolio1 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Capital Research and Management Company	0.82%*	17.67%	13.57%	13.59%
	SA BlackRock Advantage International Portfolio3 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC BlackRock Investment Management, LLC3	1.12%*	20.99%	5.23%	6.11%
	SA Fidelity Institutional AM Global Equities Portfolio4 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC FIAM LLC4	1.07%*	21.87%	13.53%	11.10%
	SA Fidelity Institutional AM Real Estate Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC FIAM LLC	1.10%	1.25%	4.65%	5.18%
	SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Brandywine Global Investment Management, LLC	0.95%*	16.83%	13.57%	11.32%
	SA Franklin Small Company Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC	1.25%*	6.14%	8.32%	9.41%
	SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Franklin Advisers, Inc.	0.89%	16.68%	11.52%	12.31%
	SA Invesco Growth Opportunities Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Invesco Advisers, Inc.	1.07%	5.92%	-0.96%	8.86%
	SA Janus Focused Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Janus Capital Management, LLC	1.05%*	18.04%	11.40%	15.34%
	SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.	1.41%*	36.00%	4.37%	8.15%

A-2

Type	Underlying Fund – Share Class Advisor Subadvisor (if applicable)	Current Expenses	Average Annual Total Returns (as of 12/31/2025)
Type		Current Expenses	1 Year	5 Year	10 Year
Stock (continued)	SA JPMorgan Equity-Income Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.	0.84%	14.31%	10.52%	10.81%
	SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.	0.94%*	14.15%	12.71%	12.44%
	SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.	1.02%*	7.86%	3.99%	11.89%
	SA MFS Large Cap Growth Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company	0.93%	16.39%	14.85%	15.87%
	SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Massachusetts Financial Services Company	0.95%*	13.52%	11.20%	12.37%
	SA PIMCO RAE International Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Pacific Investment Management Company, LLC	1.09%*	35.91%	10.00%	5.99%
	SA Putnam International Value Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Putnam Investment Management, LLC	1.18%*	34.95%	12.59%	8.79%
	SA Wellington Capital Appreciation Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Wellington Management Company LLP	0.98%	14.26%	8.54%	15.75%
Volatility Control	SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation Portfolio1 – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Capital Research and Management Company	1.15%*	10.83%	7.40%	7.96%
	SA Schroders VCP Global Allocation Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC Schroder Investment Management North America	1.16%*	12.32%	5.73%	N/A
	SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.	1.09%	15.97%	6.81%	N/A
	SA VCP Dynamic Allocation Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC AllianceBernstein L.P.	1.01%	11.13%	5.34%	7.51%
	SA VCP Dynamic Strategy Portfolio – Class 3 SunAmerica Asset Management, LLC AllianceBernstein L.P.	1.03%	10.89%	5.66%	7.19%

* This Underlying Fund is subject to an expense reimbursement or fee waiver arrangement resulting in a temporary expense reduction. See the Underlying Fund prospectus for additional information.

Capital Research and Management Company is the investment adviser of the master fund in which this Underlying Fund (Master-Feeder Fund) invests. Under a master-feeder fund structure, the feeder fund does not buy individual securities directly. Rather, the feeder fund invests all of its investment assets in a corresponding master fund, which invests directly in individual securities.

On July 28, 2025, SA Wellington Government and Quality Bond Portfolio was renamed SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond Portfolio and Goldman Sachs Asset Management L.P. became its subadvisor.

On May 1, 2026, SA Morgan Stanley International Equities Portfolio was renamed SA BlackRock Advantage International Portfolio and BlackRock Investment Management, LLC became its subadvisor.

On July 28, 2025, SA JPMorgan Global Equities Portfolio was renamed SA Fidelity Institutional AM Global Equities Portfolio and FIAM LLC became its subadvisor.

Fixed Accounts

The following is a list of Fixed Accounts currently available under the contract. We may change the features of the Fixed Accounts listed below, offer new Fixed Accounts, and terminate existing Fixed Accounts. We will provide you with written notice before doing so.

A-3

See INVESTMENT OPTIONS - FIXED ACCOUNTS in the prospectus for a description of the Fixed Accounts' features.

Name	Terms	Minimum Guaranteed Interest Rate
1-Year Fixed Account	1-Year	1%
Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account	6-Month, 12-Month, 2-Year*	1%
Secure Value Account**	1-Year	1%

* The 2-Year term for the Dollar Cost Averaging Fixed Account is not available for contracts issued on or after October 1, 2013.

** If you elect a Living Benefit, a certain percentage (either 10% or 20%) of your investment will automatically be allocated to the Secure Value Account. Amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account may not be transferred to any other investment option. You may not transfer into or out of the Secure Value Account.

INVESTMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFITS

If you elected an optional Living Benefit, your contract is subject to investment requirements, as reflected below. Depending on the optional Living Benefit you elected, you may not be able to invest in certain investment options. If you did not elect any optional benefits, or if the only optional benefit you elected is a death benefit, your contract is not subject to investment requirements.

This section contains the investment requirements for the following optional Living Benefits that we are no longer offering to investors:

•

Polaris Income Plus Daily

•

Polaris Income Plus (formerly SunAmerica Income Plus)

•

Polaris Income Builder (formerly SunAmerica Income Builder)

•

MarketLock for Life

•

MarketLock for Life (First and Second Extensions Elected)

A-4

Polaris Income Plus Daily

Investment Requirements for Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 1, 2 or 3

If you elect the optional Polaris Income Plus Daily Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets in accordance with A or B:

10% Secure Value Account and select only one Allocation*:

Allocation 1

Allocation 2

Allocation 3

Allocation 4

*Please see POLARIS PORTFOLIO ALLOCATOR PROGRAM and

50%-50% COMBINATION MODEL PROGRAM FOR

CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO FEBRUARY 6, 2017 later in

this Appendix for the allocations for the formerly available Polaris

Portfolio Allocator Models.

10% Secure Value Account and select up to 90% in one or

more of the following Variable Portfolios:

Asset Allocation Portfolios:

SA American Funds Asset Allocation

SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced

SA MFS Total Return

Actively Managed Fund-of-Funds:

SA Allocation Balanced

SA Allocation Aggressive

SA Allocation Moderate

SA Allocation Moderately Growth

Actively Managed Fund-of-Funds with Volatility

Control:

SA VCP Dynamic Allocation

SA VCP Dynamic Strategy

Fixed Income and Money Market Portfolios:

Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market Fund

SA American Century Inflation Managed

SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond

SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond

SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond

SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities

Volatility Control Portfolios:

SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation

SA Schroders VCP Global Allocation

SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced

DCA Fixed Accounts*

6-Month DCA

1-Year DCA

You may use a DCA Fixed Account to invest you target allocation in accordance with the investment requirements.

If your contract was issued prior to October 1, 2016, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus (formerly named “SunAmerica Income Plus” for contracts issued January 23, 2012 and after) or Polaris Income Builder (formerly named “SunAmerica Income Builder” for contracts issued January 23, 2012 and after) living benefits, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected.

Polaris Income Plus

If your contract was purchased between May 1, 2015 and September 30, 2016 and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1, 2 or 3 Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets in accordance with the following:

10% Secure

Value Account

90% in one or more of the following Variable

Portfolios, except as otherwise noted:

Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market

Fund

SA American Century Inflation Managed

SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation*

SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond

SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality

Bond

SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond

SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities

SA Schroders VCP Global Allocation*

SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced*

SA VCP Dynamic Allocation

SA VCP Dynamic Strategy

*You may invest up to a maximum of 50% in each of

these Variable Portfolios.

If your contract was purchased between January 23, 2012 and April 30, 2015 and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1, 2 or 3 Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets in accordance with the following:

20% Secure

Value Account

80% in one or more of the following Variable

Portfolios, except as otherwise noted:

Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market

Fund

SA American Century Inflation Managed

SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation*

SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond

SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality

Bond

SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond

SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities

SA Schroders VCP Global Allocation*

SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced*

SA VCP Dynamic Allocation

SA VCP Dynamic Strategy

*You may invest up to a maximum of 50% in each of

these Variable Portfolios.

A-5

If your contract was purchased between January 23, 2012 through September 30, 2013, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus Income Option with Custom Allocation Living Benefit, the following investment requirements are applicable:

Option 1	10% Secure Value Account	90% in Allocation 1, 2 or 3* *Please see the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models in the POLARIS PORTFOLIO ALLOCATOR PROGRAM and 50%-50% COMBINATION MODEL PROGRAM FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO FEBRUARY 6, 2017 at the end of this Appendix.
Option 2	10% Secure Value Account	90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios: Franklin Income VIP Fund SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Moderate SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA MFS Total Return SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy
Option 3	10% Secure Value Account	90% SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

If you choose the Build-Your-Own Option, after investing 10% in the Secure Value Account, the remaining 90% of Purchase Payments must be invested among the Variable Portfolios, as follows:

Investment Group	Flexible Allocation	Variable Portfolios and/or DCA Fixed Accounts
A. Bond, Cash and DCA Fixed Accounts	Minimum 20% Maximum 90%	SA American Century Inflation Managed SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities DCA Fixed Accounts* DCA 6-Month 1-Year DCA 2-Year DCA

Investment Group	Flexible Allocation	Variable Portfolios and/or DCA Fixed Accounts
B. Equity**	Minimum 0% Maximum 70%	Franklin Income VIP Fund Franklin Allocation VIP Fund Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund Lord Abbett Growth and Income SA AB Growth SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Aggressive SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA Allocation Moderate SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA American Funds Global Growth SA American Funds Growth SA American Funds Growth-Income SA BlackRock Advantage International SA Fidelity Institutional AM Global Equities SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value SA Janus Focused Growth SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA JPMorgan Equity-Income SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust SA MFS Total Return SA MFS Large Cap Growth SA PIMCO RAE International Value Portfolio SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond SA Putnam International Value SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy SA Wellington Capital Appreciation
C. Limited Equity	Minimum 0% Maximum 10%	SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation SA Fidelity Institutional AM Real Estate SA Franklin Small Company Value SA Invesco Growth Opportunities SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets

You may use a DCA Fixed Account to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.

Not all funds listed in the Equity group invest in equity markets.

A-6

If your contract was purchased prior to January 23, 2012, and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus (renamed Polaris Income Plus) Income Option 1 or 2 or 3 Living Benefit, the following investment requirements are applicable:

Flexible Allocation – Options 1-3

Option 1	10% Secure Value Account	90% in Allocation* 1, 2 or 3 *Please see POLARIS PORTFOLIO ALLOCATOR PROGRAM and 50%-50% COMBINATION MODEL PROGRAM FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO FEBRUARY 6, 2017 later in this Appendix for the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models.
Option 2	10% Secure Value Account	90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios: Franklin Income VIP Fund SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Moderate SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA MFS Total Return SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy
Option 3	10% Secure Value Account	90% SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

Flexible Allocation – Build-Your-Own Option 4:

If you choose the Build-Your-Own Option, after investing 10% in the Secure Value Account, the remaining 90% of Purchase Payments must be invested among the Variable Portfolios, as follows:

Investment Group	Flexible Allocation	Variable Portfolios and/or DCA Fixed Accounts
A. Bond, and DCA Fixed Accounts	Minimum 20% Maximum 90%	SA American Century Inflation Managed SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities DCA Fixed Accounts* DCA 6-Month 1-Year DCA 2-Year DCA Fixed Accounts 1-Year Fixed (if available)

Investment Group	Flexible Allocation	Variable Portfolios and/or DCA Fixed Accounts
B. Equity**	Minimum 0% Maximum 70%	Franklin Allocation VIP Fund Franklin Income VIP Fund Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund Lord Abbett Growth and Income SA AB Growth SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Aggressive SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA Allocation Moderate SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA American Funds Global Growth SA American Funds Growth SA American Funds Growth-Income SA BlackRock Advantage International SA Fidelity Institutional AM Global Equities SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value SA Janus Focused Growth SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA JPMorgan Equity-Income SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth SA MFS Large Cap Growth SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust SA MFS Total Return SA PIMCO RAE International Value SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond SA Putnam International Value SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy SA Wellington Capital Appreciation
C. Limited Equity	Minimum 0% Maximum 10%	SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation SA Fidelity Institutional AM Real Estate SA Franklin Small Company Value SA Invesco Growth Opportunities SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets

You may use a DCA Fixed Account to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.

Not all funds listed in the Equity group invest in equity markets.

A-7

POLARIS INCOME BUILDER

If your contract was purchased between May 1, 2015 and September 30, 2016 and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets in accordance with the following:

10% Secure

Value Account

90% in one or more of the following Variable

Portfolios, except as otherwise noted:

Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market

Fund

SA American Century Inflation Managed

SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation*

SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond

SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality

Bond

SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond

SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities

SA Schroders VCP Global Allocation*

SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced*

SA VCP Dynamic Allocation

SA VCP Dynamic Strategy

*You may invest up to a maximum of 50% in each of

these Variable Portfolios.

If your contract was purchased between January 23, 2012 and April 30, 2015 and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder Living Benefit, you must allocate your assets in accordance with the following:

20% Secure

Value Account

80% in one or more of the following Variable

Portfolios, except as otherwise noted:

Goldman Sachs VIT Government Money Market

Fund

SA American Century Inflation Managed

SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation*

SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond

SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality

Bond

SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond

SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities

SA Schroders VCP Global Allocation*

SA T. Rowe Price VCP Balanced*

SA VCP Dynamic Allocation

SA VCP Dynamic Strategy

*You may invest up to a maximum of 50% in each of

these Variable Portfolios.

If your contract was purchased prior to January 23, 2012, and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Builder (renamed Polaris Income Builder) with Flexible Allocation Living Benefit, the following investment requirements are applicable:

Flexible Allocation – Options 1-3

Option 1	10% Secure Value Account	90% in Allocation 1, 2 or 3* *Please see the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models in the POLARIS PORTFOLIO ALLOCATOR PROGRAM and 50%-50% COMBINATION MODEL PROGRAM FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO FEBRUARY 6, 2017 at the end of this Appendix.
Option 2	10% Secure Value Account	90% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios: Franklin Income VIP Fund SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Moderate Aggressive SA Allocation Moderate SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA MFS Total Return SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy
Option 3	10% Secure Value Account	90% SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond

Flexible Allocation – Build-Your-Own Option 4:

If you choose the Build-Your-Own Option, after investing 10% in the Secure Value Account, the remaining 90% of Purchase Payments must be invested among the Variable Portfolios, as follows:

Investment Group	Flexible Allocation	Variable Portfolios and/or DCA Fixed Accounts
A. Bond, Cash and DCA Fixed Accounts	Minimum 20% Maximum 90%	SA American Century Inflation Managed SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities DCA Fixed Accounts* DCA 6-Month 1-Year DCA 2-Year DCA Fixed Accounts 1-Year Fixed (if available)

A-8

Investment Group	Flexible Allocation	Variable Portfolios and/or DCA Fixed Accounts
B. Equity**	Minimum 0% Maximum 70%	Franklin Income VIP Fund Franklin Allocation VIP Fund Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund Lord Abbett Growth and Income SA AB Growth SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Aggressive SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA Allocation Moderate SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA American Funds Global Growth SA American Funds Growth SA American Funds Growth-Income SA BlackRock Advantage International SA Fidelity Institutional AM Global Equities SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value SA Janus Focused Growth SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA JPMorgan Equity-Income SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust SA MFS Total Return SA MFS Large Cap Growth SA PIMCO RAE International Value Portfolio SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond SA Putnam International Value SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy SA Wellington Capital Appreciation
C. Limited Equity	Minimum 0% Maximum 10%	SA American Funds VCP Managed Allocation SA Fidelity Institutional AM Real Estate SA Franklin Small Company Value SA Invesco Growth Opportunities SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets

You may use a DCA Fixed Account to invest your target allocations in accordance with the investment requirements.

Not all funds listed in the Equity group invest in equity markets.

MARKETLOCK FOR LIFE

If your contract was issued prior to January 23, 2012 and you elected the optional MarketLock for Life Living Benefit, you must comply with investment requirements by allocating your investments in one of four ways or if using a DCA Fixed Account or a DCA Program, by indicating your target allocations, in one of four ways:

1	Invest in one of the three available Allocations: Allocation 1, Allocation 2 or Allocation 3 Please see POLARIS PORTFOLIO ALLOCATOR PROGRAM and 50%-50% COMBINATION MODEL PROGRAM FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO FEBRUARY 6, 2017 later in this Appendix for the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models.
2	Invest in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios: Franklin Income VIP Fund SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Moderate SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA MFS Total Return SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy
3	Invest in the SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond
4	In accordance with the requirements outlined in the table below:

Investment Group	Investment Requirement	Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts
A. Bond, Cash and Fixed Accounts	Minimum 30% Maximum 100%	SA American Century Inflation Managed SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities DCA Fixed Accounts* 6-Month DCA 1-Year DCA 2-Year DCA Fixed Accounts 1-Year Fixed (if available)

A-9

Investment Group	Investment Requirement	Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts
B. Equity	Minimum 0% Maximum 70%	Franklin Income VIP Fund Franklin Allocation VIP Fund Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund Lord Abbett Growth and Income SA AB Growth SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Aggressive SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA Allocation Moderate SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA American Funds Global Growth SA American Funds Growth SA American Funds Growth-Income SA BlackRock Advantage International SA Fidelity Institutional AM Global Equities SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value SA Janus Focused Growth SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA JPMorgan Equity-Income SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust SA MFS Total Return SA MFS Large Cap Growth SA PIMCO RAE International Value Portfolio SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond SA Putnam International Value SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy SA Wellington Capital Appreciation
C. Limited Equity	Minimum 0% Maximum 10%	SA Fidelity Institutional AM Real Estate SA Franklin Small Company Value SA Invesco Growth Opportunities SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets

MARKETLOCK FOR LIFE FIRST and second extensions

If you purchased a contract prior to January 20, 2012 and you elected the optional MarketLock For Life Living Benefit and have elected the first and the second Extensions, you must comply with investment requirements by allocating your investments in accordance with one of the four ways:

Option 1	100% in one or more of the following: SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy
Option 2	At least 50% and up to 100% in one or more of the following: SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy Up to 50% in one or more of the following Variable Portfolios: Franklin Income VIP Fund SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Moderate SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA MFS Total Return
Option 3	25% SA VCP Dynamic Allocation and 25% SA VCP Dynamic Strategy and 50% in one of the following Allocations: Allocation 1, Allocation 2 or Allocation 3 Please see POLARIS PORTFOLIO ALLOCATOR PROGRAM and 50%-50% COMBINATION MODEL PROGRAM FOR CONTRACTS ISSUED PRIOR TO FEBRUARY 6, 2017 later in this Appendix for the allocations for the formerly available Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models.
Option 4	At least 50% and up to 100% in one or more of the following: SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond SA VCP Dynamic Allocation SA VCP Dynamic Strategy Up to 50% in accordance with the requirements outlined in the table below:

Investment Group	Investment Requirement	Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts
A. Bond, Cash and Fixed Accounts	Minimum 15% Maximum 50%	SA American Century Inflation Portfolio SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities Fixed Accounts 1-Year Fixed (if available)

A-10

Investment Group	Investment Requirement	Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts
B. Equity Maximum	Minimum 0% Maximum 35%	Franklin Allocation VIP Fund Franklin Income VIP Fund Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund Lord Abbett Growth and Income SA AB Growth SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value SA Allocation Balanced SA Allocation Aggressive SA Allocation Moderately Aggressive SA Allocation Moderate SA American Funds Asset Allocation SA American Funds Global Growth SA American Funds Growth SA American Funds Growth-Income SA BlackRock Advantage International SA Fidelity Institutional AM Global Equities SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value SA Janus Focused Growth SA JPMorgan Diversified Balanced SA JPMorgan Equity-Income SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core SA JPMorgan Mid-Cap Growth SA MFS Large Cap Growth SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust SA MFS Total Return SA PIMCO RAE International Value SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond SA Putnam International Value SA Wellington Capital Appreciation
C. Limited Equity	Minimum 0% Maximum 5%	SA Fidelity Institutional AM® Real Estate SA Franklin Small Company Value SA Invesco Growth Opportunities SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets

Polaris Portfolio Allocator Program and 50%-50% Combination Model Program for Contracts Issued Prior to February 6, 2017

Effective on February 6, 2017, the Polaris Allocator Program is no longer offered.

If you invested in a Polaris Portfolio Allocator Model prior to February 6, 2017, you will remain invested in the same Variable Portfolios and in the same amounts and weights as before the Polaris Portfolio Allocator Program was terminated; however, the investment will no longer be considered to be a Polaris Portfolio Allocator Model and you may no longer trade into a Polaris Portfolio Allocator Model. Any active asset rebalancing or dollar cost averaging programs will continue according to your current allocations on file. You should speak with your financial representative about how to keep the Variable Portfolio allocations in each Portfolio Allocator Model in line with your investment goals over time.

Additionally, if you elected a living benefit which allowed Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models as part of the investment requirements, you may trade out of your allocation at any time into any investment that meets your living benefit’s investment requirements, including the asset allocation of the Variable Portfolios listed in the following table (“Allocations”). After the termination effective date, only the asset allocation of the Variable Portfolios of your current model or the Allocations below will meet the investment requirements for living benefits which previously allowed Polaris Portfolio Allocator Models. Please see Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits above for the investment requirements associated with your Living Benefit.

A-11

Allocations (effective February 6, 2017)

Variable Portfolios	Allocation 1	Allocation 2	Allocation 3	Allocation 4*
Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund	5.00%	5.00%	6.00%	8.00%
Invesco V.I. Growth and Income Fund	6.00%	7.00%	8.00%	8.00%
SA AB Growth	3.00%	4.00%	4.00%	6.00%
SA AB Small & Mid Cap Value	1.00%	1.00%	1.00%	2.00%
SA American Century Inflation Managed	5.00%	3.00%	2.00%	0.00%
SA American Funds Global Growth	2.00%	3.00%	4.00%	6.00%
SA American Funds Growth-Income	0.00%	0.00%	1.00%	4.00%
SA BlackRock Advantage International	3.00%	3.00%	4.00%	5.00%
SA Federated Hermes Corporate Bond	10.00%	8.00%	7.00%	1.00%
SA Fidelity Institutional AM Real Estate	0.00%	0.00%	0.00%	1.00%
SA Franklin BW U.S. Large Cap Value	4.00%	4.00%	4.00%	5.00%
SA Franklin Small Company Value	0.00%	2.00%	2.00%	1.00%
SA Franklin Systematic U.S. Large Cap Value	3.00%	3.00%	3.00%	5.00%
SA Goldman Sachs Government and Quality Bond	8.00%	8.00%	7.00%	2.00%
SA Janus Focused Growth	0.00%	1.00%	1.00%	2.00%
SA JPMorgan Emerging Markets	0.00%	1.00%	2.00%	2.00%
SA JPMorgan Equity-Income	6.00%	7.00%	8.00%	8.00%
SA JPMorgan Large Cap Core	3.00%	4.00%	4.00%	6.00%
SA JPMorgan MFS Core Bond	17.00%	13.00%	10.00%	5.00%
SA JPMorgan Ultra-Short Bond	2.00%	1.00%	0.00%	0.00%
SA MFS Large Cap Growth	2.00%	3.00%	4.00%	4.00%
SA MFS Massachusetts Investors Trust	6.00%	6.00%	7.00%	8.00%
SA PIMCO Global Bond Opportunities	4.00%	4.00%	2.00%	2.00%
SA PIMCO RAE International Value	3.00%	3.00%	3.00%	4.00%
SA PineBridge High-Yield Bond	4.00%	3.00%	2.00%	0.00%
SA Wellington Capital Appreciation	3.00%	3.00%	4.00%	5.00%
Total	100%	100%	100%	100%

Allocation 4 above is only available if you elected the Polaris Income Plus Daily Living Benefit prior to February 6, 2017.

Effective on February 6, 2017, the Combination Model Program will no longer be offered.

If you invested in a Combination Model prior to February 6, 2017, you will remain invested in the same Variable Portfolios and in the same amounts and weights as before the Polaris Portfolio Allocator Program was terminated; however, the investment will no longer be considered to be a 50%-50% Combination Model and you may no longer trade into any other Combination Model. Any active asset rebalancing or dollar cost averaging programs will continue according to your current allocations on file. You should speak with your financial representative about how to keep the Variable Portfolio allocations in each Portfolio Allocator Model in line with your investment goals over time.

A-12

Appendix B – State Contract Availability and/or Variability

PROSPECTUS PROVISION	AVAILABILITY OR VARIATION	ISSUE STATE
Administration Charge	Contract Maintenance Fee is $30.	New Mexico
Administration Charge	Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios only.	Oregon Texas Washington
Annuity Date	You may switch to the Income Phase any time after your first contract anniversary.	Florida
Joint Ownership	Benefits and Features to be made available to Domestic Partners.	California District of Columbia Maine Nevada Oregon Washington Wisconsin
Joint Ownership	Benefits and Features to be made available to Civil Union Partners.	Colorado Hawaii Illinois New Jersey
Living Benefits	Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios only.	Oregon Texas Washington
Minimum Contract Value	The minimum remaining contract value after a partial withdrawal must be $2,000.	Texas
Nursing Home Waiver	The Nursing Home Waiver is not available for contracts purchased on or after May 1, 2014.	California
Polaris Income Plus Daily (only)	Charge will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios only.	Hawaii Missouri Oregon Texas Washington
Purchase Payment Age Limit	The Purchase Payment Age Limit is the later of six years after contract issue or the Owner’s 66th birthday for contracts issued May 2, 2011 through August 2, 2015. The Purchase Payment Age limit is not applicable to contracts issued on or after August 3, 2015.	Kentucky Minnesota Oklahoma Texas
Purchase Payment Age Limit	The Purchase Payment Age Limit is the later of two years after contract issue or the Owner’s 62nd birthday for contracts issued May 2, 2011 through August 2, 2015. The Purchase Payment Age limit is not applicable to contracts issued on or after August 3, 2015.	Washington
Transfer Privilege	Any transfer over the limit of 15 will incur a $10 transfer fee.	Pennsylvania Texas

B-1

Appendix C – Formula and Examples of calculations of the Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily Fee

The fee for Polaris Income Plus, Polaris Income Builder and Polaris Income Plus Daily is assessed against the Income Base and deducted from the contract value at the end of each Benefit Quarter.

Number of Covered Persons	Initial Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annual Fee Rate	Minimum Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annualized Fee Rate Decrease or Increase Each Benefit Quarter*
One Covered Person	1.10%	2.20%	0.60%	±0.25%
Two Covered Persons	1.35%	2.70%	0.60%	±0.25%

The fee rate can decrease or increase no more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25%/ 4).

The Initial Annual Fee Rate is guaranteed for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. Any fee rate adjustment is based on the non-discretionary formula stated below which is tied to the change in the Volatility Index (“VIX”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. The fee rate is based on the average of all VIX values as of Market Close on each day during the Benefit Quarter for which the fee is being calculated (the “Average Value of the VIX”). In general, as the Average Value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the maximums and minimums identified in the table above.

The non-discretionary formula used in the calculation of the Annual Fee Rate applicable after the first Benefit Year is:

Initial Annual Fee Rate + [0.05% x (Average Value of the VIX – 20)]

You may find the value of the VIX for any given day by going to the Chicago Board Options Exchange website, www.cboe.com.

Example

Assume you elect Polaris Income Plus for one Covered Person and you invest a single Purchase Payment of $100,000 with no additional Purchase Payments and no withdrawals before the 16th Benefit Quarter. Assume the Average Value of the VIX, Calculated Formula

Value, Annual Fee Rate and Quarterly Fee Rate are as follows:

Benefit Quarter	Average Value of VIX	Calculated Formula Value*	Annual Fee Rate	Quarterly Fee Rate**
1st	24.82	N/A	1.10%	0.2750%
2nd	21.49	N/A	1.10%	0.2750%
3rd	24.16	N/A	1.10%	0.2750%
4th	19.44	N/A	1.10%	0.2750%
5th	16.88	0.94%	0.94%	0.2350%

The Calculated Formula Value equals the number resulting from application of the formula stated above. This amount is compared to the minimum and maximum fee and the maximum quarterly fee increase to determine the annual fee rate each quarter.

The Quarterly Fee Rate is the Annual Fee Rate divided by 4.

In the 5th Benefit Quarter, the Average Value of the VIX decreases to 16.88. We calculate the Annual Fee Rate in the 5th Benefit Quarter as follows:

Step 1:

Calculation of the Annual Fee Rate

Initial Annual Fee Rate + [0.05% x (Average Value of VIX – 20)]

1.10% + [0.05% x (16.88 – 20)]

1.10% +[0.05% x (–3.12)]

1.10% + (–0.0016) = 0.94% (Annual Fee Rate)

Step 2:

Determine whether the Annual Fee Rate calculated in Step 1 is within the Maximum or Minimum Annual Fee Rate and within the Maximum Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Increase or Decrease

1.10% – 0.94% = 0.16% which is within 0.25% of the previous Annual Fee Rate (1.10%).

0.94% is higher than the Minimum Annual Fee Rate (0.60%) and is lower than the Maximum Annual Fee Rate (2.20%).

Therefore, the Annual Fee Rate for the 5th Benefit Quarter is 0.94%.

The Quarterly Fee Rate is 0.2350% (or 0.94% divided by 4).

C-1

After the 5th Benefit Quarter, assume the Average Value of the VIX, Calculated Formula Value, Annual Fee Rate and Quarterly Fee Rate are as follows:

Benefit Quarter	Average Value of VIX	Calculated Formula Value	Annual Fee Rate	Quarterly Fee Rate
6th	20.00	1.10%	1.10%	0.2750%
7th	25.57	1.38%	1.35%	0.3375%
8th	30.22	1.61%	1.60%	0.4000%
9th	26.02	1.40%	1.40%	0.3500%
10th	22.83	1.24%	1.24%	0.3100%
11th	19.88	1.09%	1.09%	0.2725%
12th	20.60	1.13%	1.13%	0.2825%
13th	14.44	0.82%	0.88%	0.2200%
14th	13.41	0.77%	0.77%	0.1925%
15th	9.11	0.56%	0.60%	0.1500%
16th	16.30	0.92%	0.85%	0.2125%

In the 7th Benefit Quarter, the Average Value of the VIX increases to 25.57. We calculate the Annual Fee Rate in the 7th Benefit Quarter as follows:

Step 1:

Calculation of the Annual Fee Rate

Initial Annual Fee Rate + [0.05% x (Average Value of VIX – 20)]

1.10% + [0.05% x (25.57 – 20)]

1.10% + [0.05% x (5.57)]

1.10% + (0.00278) = 1.38% (Annual Fee Rate)

Step 2:

Determine whether the Annual Fee Rate calculated in Step 1 is within the Maximum or Minimum Annual Fee Rate and within the Maximum Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Increase or Decrease

1.38% – 1.10% = 0.28% which is more than 0.25% higher than the previous Annual Fee Rate of 1.10%.

The Annual Fee Rate is adjusted to be exactly 0.25% higher than the previous Annual Fee Rate, which is 1.35% (1.10% + 0.25%). This is within the Minimum and Maximum Annual Fee Rates.

Therefore, the Quarterly Fee Rate is 0.3375% (or 1.35% divided by 4).

In the 13th Benefit Quarter, the Average Value of the VIX decreases to 14.44. We calculate the Annual Fee Rate in the 13th Benefit Quarter as follows:

Step 1:

Calculation of the Annual Fee Rate

Initial Fee Rate + [0.05% x (Average Value of VIX – 20)]

1.10% + [0.05% x (14.44 – 20)]

1.10% + [0.05% x (–5.56)]

1.10% + (–0.00278) = 0.82% (Annual Fee Rate)

Step 2:

Determine whether the Annual Fee Rate calculated in Step 1 is within the Maximum or Minimum Annual Fee Rate and within the Maximum Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Increase or Decrease

1.13% – 0.82% = 0.31% which is more than a 0.25% Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Decrease from the previous Annual Fee Rate of 1.13%.

Therefore, the Annual Fee Rate is adjusted to be exactly 0.25% lower than the previous Annual Fee Rate, which is 0.88% (1.13% – 0.25%).

In the 15th Benefit Quarter, the Average Value of the VIX decreases to 9.11. We calculate the Annual Fee Rate in the 15th Benefit Quarter as follows:

Step 1:

Calculation of the Annual Fee Rate

Initial Fee Rate + [0.05% x (Average Value of VIX – 20)]

1.10% + [0.05% x (9.11 – 20)]

1.10% + [0.05% x (–10.89)]

1.10% + (–0.005445) = 0.56% (Annual Fee Rate)

Step 2:

Determine whether the Annual Fee Rate calculated in Step 1 is within the Maximum or Minimum Annual Fee Rate and within the Maximum Quarterly Annualized Fee Rate Increase or Decrease

The Annual Fee Rate of 0.56% is lower than the Minimum Annual Fee Rate (0.60%).

Therefore, the Annual Fee Rate is adjusted to be exactly the Minimum Annual Fee Rate, which is 0.60%.

After the 16th Benefit Quarter, the Annual Fee Rate will continue to increase or decrease depending on the movement of the Average Value of the VIX. If your contract value falls to zero before the feature has been terminated, the fee will no longer be deducted.

C-2

Appendix D – Living Benefits for Contracts Issued Prior to AUGUST 22, 2016

None of the Living Benefits described below are currently being offered.

Effective January 15, 2016, if you have elected a Living Benefit and your contract was issued:

•

Prior to January 23, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments on or after the 5th contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

•

On January 23, 2012 to November 11, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 2nd contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

•

On or after November 12, 2012, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments made on or after the 1st contract anniversary from your contract issue date.

If you elected a living benefit feature, you may not establish an automatic subsequent purchase payment plan, and any current payment plan has been terminated.

Table of Contents

Polaris Income Plus Daily	D-1
Polaris Income Plus*	D-2
Polaris Income Plus* Fee	D-6
Polaris Income Builder**	D-3
Polaris Income Builder** Fee	D-6
MarketLock For Life	D-7
MarketLock For Life Fee	D-9

formerly named “SunAmerica Income Plus”

formerly named “SunAmerica Income Builder”

Polaris Income Plus Daily

Investment Requirements

Please see Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the investment requirements associated with this optional Living Benefit.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage / Protected Income Payment Percentage:

If your contract was purchased prior to August 22, 2016, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 1, 2 or 3, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:

If no withdrawals are taken prior to the 5th contract anniversary or if the first withdrawal is taken when the Covered Person is age 68 or older:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1)	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 2	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 3
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	5.5% / 3.0%(2)	5.5% / 3.0%(2)	4.0% / 4.0%
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	5.0% / 5.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	5.0% / 3.0%(3)	5.0% / 3.0%(3)	3.5% / 3.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%	4.5% / 4.5%

If the withdrawal is taken prior to the 5th contract anniversary and Covered Person is younger than age 68:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1)	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 2	Polaris Income Plus Daily Income Option 3
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	5.0% / 2.5%(4)	5.0% / 2.5%(4)	3.5% / 3.5%
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.5% / 3.5%	6.5% / 2.5%	4.5% / 4.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	4.5% / 2.5%(5)	4.5% / 2.5%(5)	3.0% / 3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.0% / 3.5%	6.0% / 3.0%	4.0% / 4.0%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

D-1

(4) If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 3.5% if the Income Base is increased to a Step-up Value on or after the Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

(5) If Two Covered Persons are elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 3.5% if the Income Base is increased to a Step-up Value on or after the younger Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder

Income Credit

If your contract was issued prior to August 22, 2016, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus or Polaris Income Builder living benefits, the following Income Credit rates are applicable:

Optional Living Benefit	Income Credit (as a percentage of the Income Credit Base)	Income Credit Availability
Polaris Income Plus	6.0%	Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is reduced in years withdrawals are taken
Polaris Income Builder	6.0%	Available during the first 12 Benefit Years — the Income Credit is eliminated in years any withdrawal is taken

If your contract was issued prior to February 29, 2016, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus (formerly named “SunAmerica Income Plus” for contracts issued January 23, 2012 and after) or Polaris Income Builder (formerly named “SunAmerica Income Builder” for contracts issued January 23, 2012 and after) living benefits, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected.

Polaris INCOME PLUS

Investment Requirements

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage / Protected Income Payment Percentage:

If your contract was purchased between May 12, 2014 and August 21, 2016, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1, 2 or 3, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal(1)	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 2	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 3
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	5.5% / 3.0%(2)	5.5% / 3.0%(2)	4.0% / 4.0%
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%	5.0% / 5.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	5.0% / 3.0%(3)	5.0% / 3.0%(3)	3.5% / 3.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%	4.5% / 4.5%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

If your contract was issued between February 11, 2013 and May 11, 2014, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1, 2 or 3, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable to your living benefit:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 2	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 3
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	5.0% / 3.0%**	5.0% / 3.0%**	3.75% / 3.75%
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%	5.0% / 5.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	4.5% / 3.0%***	4.5% / 3.0%***	3.25% / 3.25%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.0% / 4.0%	6.0% / 3.0%	4.5% / 4.5%

D-2

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered Person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age at first withdrawal is based on the age of the younger of Two Covered Persons.

If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary Value on or after the Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

***

If Two Covered Persons are elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary Value on or after the younger Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

If your contract was issued from February 11, 2013 through September 30, 2013, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus living benefit Income Option with Custom Allocation, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Plus Income Option with Custom Allocation
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	4.5% / 3.0%**
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	4.5% / 4.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	4.0% / 3.0%***
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	4.0% / 4.0%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary Value on or after the Covered Person's 65th birthday.

***

If Two Covered Persons are elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary

Value on or after the younger Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

If your contract was issued from June 18, 2012 through February 10, 2013, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus living benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person At First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 2
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	5.5% / 3.0%**	5.5% / 3.0%**
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	5.0% / 3.0%***	5.0% / 3.0%***
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.0% / 4.0%	6.0% / 3.0%

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person At First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 3	Polaris Income Plus Option With Custom Allocation
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	3.75% / 3.75%	4.5% / 3.0%**
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.0% / 5.0%	4.5% / 4.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	3.25% / 3.25%	4.0% / 3.0%***
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	4.5% / 4.5%	4.0% / 4.0%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary Value on or after the Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

***

If Two covered Persons are elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary Value on or after the younger Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

POLARIS INCOME BUILDER

Investment Requirements

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage /Protected
Income Payment Percentage:

If your contract was issued from May 1, 2013 through February 28, 2016, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder living benefit, the following Maximum

D-3

Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Builder
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.5% / 5.25%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.0% / 4.75%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age at first withdrawal is based on the age of the younger of Two Covered Persons.

If your contract was issued from February 11, 2013 through April 30, 2013, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder living benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Builder
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.25% / 5.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	4.75% / 4.5%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

If your contract was issued from June 18, 2012 through February 10, 2013, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder living benefit, the following Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and Protected Income Payment Percentage rates are applicable:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Builder
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	3.75% / 3.75%
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	4.75% / 4.75%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	3.25% / 3.25%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	4.25% / 4.25%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

Income Credit:

If your contract was issued prior to February 11, 2013, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder living benefit, the annual Income Credit percentage is 8%.

Minimum Issue Age:

If your contract was issued prior to February 11, 2013, and you elected the optional Polaris Income Builder living benefit, the minimum issue age was 45.

If your contract was issued from January 23, 2012 through November 11, 2012, and you elected either the optional Polaris Income Plus or Polaris Income Builder living benefit, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected:

Under Living Benefit Defined Terms, the terms “Eligible Purchase Payments” and “Ineligible Purchase Payments” are defined as follows:

Eligible Purchase Payments

Eligible Purchase Payments are Purchase Payments, or portions thereof, made on or after the Benefit Effective Date as shown in the table below and are included in the calculation of the Income Base and Income Credit Base. The calculation of Eligible Purchase Payments does not include Income Credits or the Continuation Contribution, if any. However, the Continuation Contribution, if any, is included in the calculation of Anniversary Values. Total Purchase Payments are limited to $1,500,000 without prior Company approval. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments after the 2nd Contract Year.

First Contract Year	Subsequent Contract Years
100% of Purchase Payments received	Purchase Payments received in Contract Year 2, capped at 100% of Purchase Payments received in the first Contract Year

Example: If you made a $100,000 Purchase Payment in contract year 1, Eligible Purchase Payments will include additional Purchase Payments of up to $100,000 in contract year 2 for a grand total maximum of $200,000 of Eligible Purchase Payments. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments after the 2nd Contract Year.

Ineligible Purchase Payments

Purchase Payments, or portions thereof, received after the 2nd Contract Year, or that are in excess of the caps discussed in the table under “Eligible Purchase Payments” above. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments after the 2nd Contract Year.

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage /Protected
Income Payment Percentage:

If your contract was issued between January 23, 2012 and June 17, 2012 and you elected the optional Polaris Income Plus or Polaris Income Builder living benefits, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected. All other Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder provisions

D-4

discussed in the prospectus above apply to your elected feature except for the following:

Under the question, “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” the income options under Polaris Income Plus and Polaris Income Builder are as follows:

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 2
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	6.0% / 3.0%**	6.0% / 3.0%**
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	6.0% / 4.0%	7.0% / 3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	5.5% / 3.0%***	5.5% / 3.0%***
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.5% / 4.0%	6.5% / 3.0%

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Plus Income Option 3	Polaris Income Plus With Custom Allocation
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	4.0% / 4.0%	5.0% / 3.0%**
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.25% / 5.25%	5.0% / 4.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	3.5% / 3.5%	4.5% / 3.0%***
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	4.75% / 4.75%	4.5% / 4.0%

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Polaris Income Builder
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	4.0% / 4.0%
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.0% / 5.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	3.5% / 3.5%
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	4.5% / 4.5%

The first percentage represents the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage and the second percentage represents the Protected Income Payment Percentage for each of the options shown.

If there is One Covered Person but there are joint Owners, the Covered Person is the older Owner. If there are Two Covered Persons, the age of first withdrawal is based on the age of the younger of Two Covered Persons.

If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary Value on or after the Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

***

If your contract was issued prior to January 23, 2012 and you elected the optional SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica Income Builder living benefits, the following provisions are applicable to the feature you elected. All other SunAmerica Income Plus and SunAmerica Income Builder

provisions discussed in the prospectus above apply to your elected feature except for the following provisions:

Under Living Benefit Defined Terms, the terms “Eligible Purchase Payments” and “Investment Requirements” are defined as follows:

Eligible Purchase Payments

First Contract Year	Subsequent Contract Years
100% of Purchase Payments Received	Purchase Payments received in contract years 2-5, capped at 200% of Purchase Payments received in the first contract year

Investment Requirements

We will allocate 10% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, to a fixed interest rate account (“Secure Value Account”). The remaining 90% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, (the “Flexible Allocation”), must be allocated by you in accordance with the investment options outlined under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT.

The following Living Benefit Defined Terms do not apply to the SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica Income Builder you elected: “Custom Allocation Income Option” and “Dynamic Allocation Income Option.”

D-5

Under the question, “What determines the amount I can receive each year?” the income options under SunAmerica Income Plus and SunAmerica Income Builder are as follows:

SunAmerica Income Plus

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Income Option 1		Income Option 2
	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage	Protected Income Payment Percentage	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage	Protected Income Payment Percentage
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	6.0%	3.0%**	6.0%	3.0%**
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	6.0%	4.0%	7.0%	3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	5.5%	3.0%***	5.5%	3.0%***
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.5%	4.0%	6.5%	3.0%

SunAmerica Income Builder

Number of Covered Persons and Age of Covered Person at First Withdrawal*	Income Option 1		Income Option 2
	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage	Protected Income Payment Percentage	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage	Protected Income Payment Percentage
One Covered Person (Age 64 and Younger)	5.5%	3.0%**	5.5%	3.0%**
One Covered Person (Age 65 and Older)	5.5%	4.0%	6.5%	3.0%
Two Covered Persons (Age 64 and Younger)	5.0%	3.0%***	5.0%	3.0%***
Two Covered Persons (Age 65 and Older)	5.0%	4.0%	6.0%	3.0%

If One Covered Person is elected, the Protected Income Payment Percentage is 4.0% if the Income Base is increased to a new highest Anniversary Value on or after the Covered Person’s 65th birthday.

***

Under the question, “Are there investment requirements if I elect SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica Income Builder?” the investment requirements under SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica Income Builder are as follows:

Are there investment requirements if I elect SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica Income Builder?

Yes. We will allocate 10% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any, to a Fixed Account (“Secure Value Account”). The Secure Value Account is only available for investment for contracts with election of SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica Income Builder. The crediting interest rate on amounts allocated to the Secure Value Account will never be less than the guaranteed minimum interest rate specified in your contract. The crediting interest rate, once established, will not change for each allocation to the Secure Value Account for the duration

of the guarantee period. The guarantee period for the Secure Value Account is a one year period that automatically renews every year from the date of each allocation to the Secure Value Account, unless the Living Benefit has been cancelled. Each allocation to the Secure Value Account may have different crediting interest rates. The remaining 90% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution, if any (the “Flexible Allocation”), must be allocated by you in accordance with the investment requirements outlined under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT. As a result, there is a risk that the overall return of 90% of every Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution may not be as high as the overall return of the entire Purchase Payment and Continuation Contribution invested in the Flexible Allocation.

Under the question, “What is the fee for SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica IncomeBuilder?” the fee for SunAmerica Income Plus or SunAmerica Income Builder is as follows:

What is the fee for SunAmerica Income Plus and SunAmerica Income Builder?

The fee for SunAmerica Income Plus and SunAmerica Income Builder is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base and deducted from the contract value on a quarterly basis beginning on the first Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the Benefit Effective Date. In Oregon, Texas and Washington, the fee will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios only. After the first Benefit Year, on each Benefit Quarter Anniversary, we will (1) deduct the fee in effect for the previous Benefit Quarter; and (2) determine the fee rate applicable to the next Benefit Quarter. Please see fee table below:

Number of Covered Persons	Initial Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annual Fee Rate	Minimum Annual Fee Rate	Maximum Annualized Fee Rate Decrease or Increase Each Benefit Quarter*
One Covered Person	1.10%	2.20%	0.60%	±0.25%
Two Covered Persons	1.35%	2.70%	0.60%	±0.25%

The quarterly fee rate will not decrease or increase by more than 0.0625% each quarter (0.25% / 4).

The initial Annual Fee Rate is guaranteed not to change for the first Benefit Year. Subsequently, the fee rate may change quarterly subject to the parameters identified in the table above. Any fee adjustment is based on a non-discretionary formula tied to the change in the Volatility Index (“VIX®”), an index of market volatility reported by the Chicago Board Options Exchange. In general, as the value of the VIX decreases or increases, your fee rate will decrease or increase accordingly, subject to the minimums and maximums identified in the table above. Should the VIX no longer be appropriate or available, we would substitute

D-6

the VIX with another measure of market volatility for determining the fee. If we substitute the VIX, we will notify you; however, the maximum and minimum annual fee rates described in this prospectus are guaranteed for the life of your contract.

Since the fee rate is assessed against the Income Base, an increase in the Income Base due to the addition of an Income Credit, attaining a higher Anniversary Value or the addition of subsequent Eligible Purchase Payments, will result in an increase to the amount of the fee you pay, assuming that the annual fee rate has not decreased as described above. Please note that this means the addition of an Income Credit will lead to paying a higher fee in any given period than without the addition of the Income Credit, and in certain instances, the value of the Income Credit may be more than offset by the amount of the fee. You will be assessed a non-refundable fee each quarter regardless of whether or not you take any withdrawals.

If your contract value falls to zero, the fee will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the Living Benefit is still in effect while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata fee is calculated by multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date when the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender, divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter Anniversaries.

Marketlock For Life

MarketLock For Life is no longer available for election. If your contract was issued prior to January 23, 2012 and you elected the MarketLock For Life living benefit, the following provisions apply.

How does MarketLock For Life work?

MarketLock For Life locks in the highest contract anniversary value in determining the Income Base. The Income Base determines the basis of the Covered Person(s)’ guaranteed lifetime benefit which may be taken in a series of withdrawals. A new Income Base is automatically locked in on each Benefit Year anniversary during the Income Base Evaluation Period (initially, the first 5 years) following the Effective Date.

You may elect to extend the Income Base Evaluation Period for additional periods. Please see “Can I extend the Income Base Evaluation Period beyond 5 years?” below.

What determines the amount I can receive each year?

The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage represents the percentage of your Income Base used to calculate the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount that you may withdraw each Benefit Year without decreasing your Income

Base. The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage is determined by the age of the Covered Person(s) at the time of the first withdrawal as shown in the table below.

One Covered Person

If the feature is elected to cover one life but the contract is jointly owned, then the Covered Person must be the older Owner and the following is applicable:

Age of the Covered Person at Time of First Withdrawal	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage
At least age 45 but prior to 65th birthday	4% of Income Base
At least age 65 but prior to 76th birthday	5% of Income Base
On or after 76th birthday	6% of Income Base

Two Covered Persons

If the feature is elected to cover two lives, the following is applicable:

Age of the Younger Covered Person or Surviving Covered Person at Time of First Withdrawal	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage
At least age 45 but prior to 65th birthday	4% of Income Base
At least age 65 but prior to 76th birthday	4.75% of Income Base
On or after 76th birthday	5.75% of Income Base

Are there investment requirements if I elect MarketLock For Life?

As long as you have not elected to cancel the feature, we require that you allocate your investments in accordance with the investment requirements. Please see Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT for the investment requirements associated with this optional Living Benefit.

The investment requirements may reduce the need to rely on the guarantees provided by this Living Benefit because they allocate your investment across asset classes and potentially limit market volatility. As a result, you may have better or worse investment returns by allocating your investments more aggressively. We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable Portfolios and/or Fixed Accounts are added, deleted, substituted, merged or otherwise reorganized. We will promptly notify you in writing of any changes to the investment requirements due to additions, deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options.

Your allocation instructions for the amount not invested in the Secure Value Account accompanying any Purchase Payment as well as your target allocations if you invest in a DCA Fixed Account must comply with the investment requirements, provided under Investment Requirements for Optional Living Benefits in APPENDIX A - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT, in order for your application or subsequent Purchase Payment(s) allocation instructions to be

D-7

considered in Good Order. You may not transfer any amounts between the Secure Value Account and the Variable Portfolios or DCA Fixed Accounts. The Secure Value Account may not be used as a target account if you are using the DCA Program to comply with investment requirements. You may not request any specific amount of any withdrawal to be deducted solely from the Secure Value Account. Rather, any withdrawal reduces the amount invested in the Secure Value Account in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduces the contract value.

We may revise the investment requirements for any existing contract to the extent that Variable Portfolios are added, deleted, substituted, merged, or otherwise reorganized. We will promptly notify you in writing of any changes to the investment requirements due to additions, deletions, substitutions, mergers or reorganizations of the investment options. The required allocation percentage to the Secured Value Account will not change for the life of your contract.

Rebalancing and Investment Requirements

We will automatically enroll you in the Automatic Asset Rebalancing Program with quarterly rebalancing. If rebalancing instructions are not provided, we will align your rebalancing allocations with your Purchase Payment allocation instructions, or if using a DCA Fixed Account, your target DCA instructions. We require quarterly rebalancing because market performance and transfer and withdrawal activity may result in your contract’s allocations going outside these requirements. Quarterly rebalancing will ensure that your allocation will continue to comply with the investment requirements for this feature.

If at any point, for any reason, your rebalancing instructions would result in allocations inconsistent with the investment requirements listed above, we will revert to the last compliant instructions on file. You can modify your rebalancing instructions, as long as they are consistent with the investment requirements, at any time by calling the Annuity Service Center.

What are the factors used to calculate MarketLock For Life?

The benefit offered by MarketLock For Life is calculated by considering the factors described below:

First, we determine the Eligible Purchase Payments. It is important to note that only Purchase Payments made during the first 5 contract years are taken into consideration in determining the Eligible Purchase Payments. We will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments after the 5th contract year.

Eligible Purchase Payments

First Contract Year	Subsequent Contract Years
100% of Purchase Payments Received	Purchase Payments received in contract years 2-5, capped at 100% of Purchase Payments received in the first contract year

Second, we consider the Income Base Evaluation Period. The Income Base Evaluation Period begins on the Effective Date and ends 5 years later. At the end of the Income Base Evaluation Period, you may contact us to extend the Income Base Evaluation Period. Please see “Can I extend the Income Base Evaluation Period beyond 5 years?” below.

Third, we determine the Anniversary Value which equals your contract value on any Benefit Anniversary during the Income Base Evaluation Period minus any Ineligible Purchase Payments. The highest Anniversary Value is the current Anniversary Value that is greater than (1) all previous Anniversary Values; and (2) Eligible Purchase Payments.

Fourth, we determine the Income Base which initially is equal to the first Eligible Purchase Payment. The Income Base is increased by each subsequent Eligible Purchase Payment, and is reduced proportionately for Excess Withdrawals.

Fifth, we determine the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, which represents the maximum amount that may be withdrawn each Benefit Year without reducing the Income Base and is calculated by multiplying the Income Base by the applicable Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage.

Finally, we determine the Excess Withdrawals.

How can the Income Base be increased?

On each Benefit Year Anniversary during the Income Base Evaluation Period, the Income Base is automatically increased to the greater of (1) the highest Anniversary Value; or (2) the current Income Base.

Increases to your Income Base occur on Benefit Year Anniversaries as described above. However, Eligible Purchase Payments can increase your Income Base at the time they are received. Since highest Anniversary Values are determined only on the Benefit Year Anniversaries,

D-8

your Income Base will not increase if your contract value was higher on days other than the Benefit Year Anniversaries.

What is the fee for MarketLock For Life?

The fee for MarketLock For Life is calculated as a percentage of the Income Base and deducted quarterly from your contract value on a quarterly basis beginning on the first Benefit Quarter Anniversary following the Benefit Effective Date. In Oregon, Texas and Washington, the fee will be deducted pro-rata from Variable Portfolios only. The fee depends on whether you elect to cover one life or two lives. The fee is as follows:

Number of Covered Persons	Annual Fee Rate
For One Covered Person	0.70% of Income Base
For Two Covered Persons	0.95% of Income Base

An increase in the Income Base due to an adjustment to a higher Anniversary Value, or subsequent Eligible Purchase Payments will result in an increase to the dollar amount of the fee. The fee of the feature may change at the time of extension and may be different than when you initially elected the feature.

If your contract value falls to zero before the feature has been terminated, fees will no longer be deducted. We will not assess the quarterly fee if you annuitize your contract or if a death benefit is paid before the end of a Benefit Quarter. If the feature is still in effect while your contract value is greater than zero, and you surrender your contract, we will assess a pro-rata charge for the fee applicable to the Benefit Quarter in which the surrender occurs if you surrender your contract before the end of a Benefit Quarter. The pro-rata charge is calculated by multiplying the fee by the number of days between the date the prior fee was last assessed and the date of surrender divided by the number of days between the prior and the next Benefit Quarter Anniversaries.

What are the effects of withdrawals on MarketLock For Life?

The Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount and the Income Base may change over time as a result of the timing and amount of withdrawals.

Withdrawals during a contract year that in total are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not reduce the Income Base. However, if you choose to take less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any Benefit Year, you may not carry over the unused amount into subsequent years. Your Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any year will not be recalculated solely as a result of taking less than the entire Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in the prior year. Please note that if you delay taking withdrawals for too long, you may limit the number of remaining years (due to your life

expectancy) in which you may take withdrawals. Excess Withdrawals may significantly reduce the value of or terminate the feature.

The impact of withdrawals and the effect on each component of MarketLock For Life are further explained below:

Income Base: If the sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year exceeds the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the Income Base will be reduced for those withdrawals.

For each Excess Withdrawal taken, the Income Base is reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. This means that the reduction in the Income Base could be more or less than a dollar-for-dollar reduction.

If you take an Excess Withdrawal, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be recalculated by multiplying the reduced Income Base by the existing Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage. This recalculated Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will be available for withdrawal at the beginning of the next Benefit Year and may be lower than your previous Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount.

All withdrawals, including withdrawals taken under this feature, reduce your contract value and your death benefit and may impact other provisions of your contract. In addition, withdrawals under this feature will reduce the free withdrawal amount and may be subject to applicable withdrawal charges if in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The sum of withdrawals in any Benefit Year up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount will not be assessed a withdrawal charge.

Can I extend the Income Base Evaluation Period beyond 5 years?

After the initial Income Base Evaluation Period, you may elect to extend the Income Base Evaluation Period for an additional 5 year period, as long as you have not elected to cancel the feature, and the age of the Covered Person or younger of two Covered Persons is 85 or younger at the time of extension (“First Extension”).

After election of the First Extension, as long as you have not elected to cancel the feature and the age of the Covered Person or younger of two Covered Persons is 85 or younger at the time of the next extension, you may elect to extend

D-9

the Income Base Evaluation Period for additional 5 year periods (“Subsequent Extensions”).

If you have already elected the First Extension and you are at least age 86 but younger than 90, you may elect a Subsequent Extension with the final evaluation occurring prior to your 91st birthday. As a result, your final extension will be for a period of less than 5 years (“Reduced Evaluation Period”).

Prior to the end of each Income Base Evaluation Period you elect to extend, we will inform you of the terms of the next extension in writing. We will provide you with an extension election form at least 30 days prior to the end of each Income Base Evaluation Period. If you elect to extend the feature, you must complete the election form and return it to us or advise us as to your intent to extend in a method acceptable to us no later than 30 days after the end of the current Income Base Evaluation Period.

The fee and investment requirements of the feature may change at the time of extension and may be different than when you initially elected the feature. We guarantee that the current fee as reflected in the Fee Table above, will not increase by more than 0.25% at the time of First Extension.

If you do not elect the First Extension, Subsequent Extensions are no longer available for election and the Income Base will not be adjusted for higher Anniversary Values on subsequent Benefit Year Anniversaries. However, you can continue to take the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in effect at the end of the last Income Base Evaluation Period. The Income Base is subject to adjustments for Excess Withdrawals. You will continue to pay the fee at the rate that was in effect during the last Income Base Evaluation Period and you will not be permitted to extend the Income Base Evaluation Period in the future. We also reserve the right to modify MarketLock For Life at the time of extension for existing contracts as indicated above.

All references to “Living Benefit” below refer to MarketLock for Life.

When and how may I elect a Living Benefit?

You may elect a Living Benefit at the time of contract issue (the “Benefit Effective Date”). You may elect to have the Living Benefit cover only your life or the lives of both you and your spouse, the “Covered Person(s).” If the contract is not owned by a natural person, references to Owner(s) apply to the Annuitant(s). To elect the Living Benefit, the Covered Persons must meet the age requirements. The age requirements vary depending on the type of contract and the number of Covered Persons. The age requirements for optional death benefits and other optional features may be different than those listed here. You must meet the age requirements for those features in order to elect them.

If you elect one Covered Person:

	Covered Person
	Minimum Age	Maximum Age
One Owner	45	80
Joint Owners(1)	45	80

If you elect two Covered Persons:

	Covered Person #1		Covered Person #2
	Minimum Age	Maximum Age	Minimum Age	Maximum Age
Non-Qualified: Joint Owners(2)	45	80	45	85
Non-Qualified: One Owner with Spousal Beneficiary	45	80	45	N/A(3)
Qualified: One Owner with Spousal Beneficiary	45	80	45	N/A(3)

(1) Based on the age of the older Owner.

(2) Based on the age of the younger Joint Owner.

(3) The age requirement is based solely on the single owner for purposes of issuing the contract with the Living Benefit. The Spousal Beneficiary’s age is not considered in determining the maximum issue age of the second Covered Person.

If I own a Qualified contract, how do Required Minimum Distributions impact my Living Benefit?

As the original Owner, or Continuing Spouse (two Covered Persons elected) electing to treat the annuity contract as their own, if you are taking required minimum distributions (“RMD”) from this contract, and the amount of the RMD (based only on the contract to which the feature is elected and using the Uniform Lifetime Table or Joint Life Expectancy Table from the regulations under the Internal Revenue Code) is greater than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount in any given Benefit Year, no portion of the RMD will be treated as an Excess Withdrawal.

D-10

What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected one Covered Person?

If there is one Covered Person and that person dies, the surviving spousal joint owner or spousal beneficiary may elect to:

Make a death claim if the contract value is greater than zero, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or

Continue the contract if the contract value is greater than zero, without the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee.

What happens to my Living Benefit upon a spousal continuation if I elected two Covered Persons?

If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of one Covered Person, the surviving Covered Person may elect to:

Make a death claim if the contract value is greater than zero, which terminates the Living Benefit and the contract; or

Continue the contract with the Living Benefit and its corresponding fee.

The components of the Living Benefit in effect at the time of spousal continuation will not change. The surviving Covered Person can elect to receive withdrawals in accordance with the provisions of the Living Benefit elected based on the age of the younger Covered Person at the time the first withdrawal was taken. If no withdrawals were taken prior to the spousal continuation, the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage will be based on the age of the surviving Covered Person at the time the first withdrawal is taken.

If spousal continuation occurs during the Income Base Evaluation Period, the Continuing Spouse will continue to receive any increases to the Income Base for the duration of the Income Base Evaluation Period, while the contract value is greater than zero. The Continuing Spouse will also be eligible to elect to extend the Income Base Evaluation Period, upon expiration of the applicable period.

Can a non-spousal Beneficiary elect to receive any remaining benefits under my Living Benefit upon the death of the second spouse?

No. Upon the death of the Covered Person(s), if the contract value is greater than zero, a non-spousal Beneficiary must

make an election under the death benefit provisions of the contract, which terminates the Living Benefit.

What happens to my Living Benefit upon the Latest Annuity Date?

If the contract value and the Income Base are greater than zero on the Latest Annuity Date, you begin the Income Phase and therefore, you must select one of the following annuity income options:

Annuitize the contract value under the contract’s annuity provisions (please see ANNUITY INCOME OPTIONS in the prospectus); or

Annuitize the contract and elect to receive the current Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount as of the Latest Annuity Date divided equally on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual frequency, as selected by you; or,

Any annuity income option mutually agreeable between you and us.

Once you begin the Income Phase by electing one of the annuity income payment options above, the Income Base will no longer be adjusted either for highest Anniversary Values or additional Income Credits. If you do not elect an option listed above, on the Latest Annuity Date, we will annuitize the contract value in accordance with Option 2 above.

Can I elect to cancel my Living Benefit?

The Living Benefit may not be cancelled by you prior to the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary unless you surrender your contract. The Living Benefit may be cancelled by you on or after the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table below.

Cancellation Request Received	Cancellation Effective Date
Years 1-5	5th Benefit Year Anniversary
Years 6-10	10th Benefit Year Anniversary
Years 10+	Benefit Year Anniversary following the receipt of the cancellation request

Once cancellation is effective, the guarantees under the Living Benefit are terminated. In addition, the investment requirements for the Living Benefit will no longer apply to your contract. You may not re-elect or reinstate the Living Benefit after cancellation. If you cancelled MarketLock For Life, you may not extend the Income Base Evaluation Period.

If there are two Covered Persons, upon the death of the first Covered Person, the surviving Covered Person (generally, the Continuing Spouse) may cancel the Living Benefit on or after the 5th Benefit Year Anniversary and the cancellation will be effective as outlined in the table above. After the cancellation effective date of the Living Benefit, there will be one final fee applicable to the Benefit Year in which the cancellation occurs, on the Benefit Year Anniversary. Thereafter, the fee will no longer be charged.

D-11

If you cancelled MarketLock For Life, the surviving Covered Person may not extend the Income Base Evaluation Period. The surviving Covered Person may no longer re-elect or reinstate the Living Benefit after cancellation.

Are there circumstances under which my Living Benefit will be automatically cancelled?

The Living Benefit will automatically be cancelled upon the occurrence of one of the following:

(i)

Annuitization of the contract; or

(ii)

Termination or surrender of the contract; or

(iii)

A death benefit is paid resulting in the contract being terminated; or

(iv)

An Excess Withdrawal that reduces the Contract Value and Income Base to zero; or

(v)

Death of the Covered Person, if only one is elected; or, if two Covered Persons are elected, death of the surviving Covered Person; or

(vi)

(vii)

A Change of the Owner or Assignment; or

(viii)You elect to cancel Your Living Benefit.

Are there circumstances under which guaranteed withdrawals for two Covered Persons, if elected, terminate for one of the Covered Persons?

Under any of the following circumstances, the living benefit will provide a guarantee for one Covered Person and not the lifetime of the other Covered Person:

One of the two Covered Persons is removed from the contract, due to reasons other than death; or

The original spousal joint Owners or Spousal Beneficiary, who are the Covered Persons, are no longer married at the time of death of the first spouse.

Any amounts that we may pay under the feature in excess of your contract value are subject to the Company’s financial strength and claims-paying ability.

D-12

Appendix E – Death Benefits Following Spousal Continuation

Certain death benefits are either no longer offered or have changed since first being offered. If your contract was issued prior to January 23, 2012, please see Appendix F for a description of the death benefit calculations and death benefit calculations following a Spousal Continuation for your contract.

The following details the standard and Maximum Anniversary Value death benefits payable upon the Continuing Spouse’s death. The death benefit we will pay to the new Beneficiary chosen by the Continuing Spouse varies depending on the death benefit option elected by the original Owner of the contract, whether a Living Benefit was elected, the age of the Continuing Spouse as of the Continuation Date and the Continuing Spouse’s date of death.

Capitalized terms used in this Appendix have the same meaning as they have in the prospectus.

We define “Continuation Net Purchase Payments” as Net Purchase Payments made on or after the Continuation Date. For the purpose of calculating Continuation Net Purchase Payments, the amount that equals the contract value on the Continuation Date, including the Continuation Contribution, is considered the initial Continuation Purchase Payment. We define “Continuation Purchase Payments” as Purchase Payments made on or after the Continuation Date. Continuation Purchase Payments will not be accepted on or after the first contract anniversary if a Living Benefit was elected.

The term “withdrawals” as used in describing the death benefits is defined as withdrawals and the fees and charges applicable to those withdrawals.

The term “Withdrawal Adjustment” is used, if a Living Benefit had been elected, to describe the way in which the amount of the death benefit will be adjusted for withdrawals depending on when the Continuing Spouse takes a withdrawal and the amount of the withdrawal. If cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year are taken prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 81st birthday and are less than or equal to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the amount of adjustment will equal the amount of each withdrawal. If a withdrawal is taken prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 81st birthday and cumulative withdrawals for the current contract year are in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount, the contract value and the death benefit are first reduced by the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount. The resulting death benefit is further adjusted by the withdrawal amount in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount by the percentage by which the excess withdrawal reduced the resulting contract value. If a withdrawal is taken on or after the Continuing Spouse’s 81st birthday, the amount of adjustment is determined by the percentage by which the withdrawal reduced the contract value.

The Company will not accept Purchase Payments from anyone age 86 or older. Therefore, the death benefit calculations described below assume that no Purchase Payments are received on or after the Continuing Spouse’s 86th birthday. We will not accept Continuation Purchase Payments on or after the first contract anniversary if you have elected a Living Benefit feature.

The standard death benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit are calculated differently depending on whether the original Owner had elected a Living Benefit, described above.

Standard and Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Payable Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death:

The following describes the standard death benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit without election of a Living Benefit:

Standard Death Benefit

If the Continuing Spouse is age 85 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greater of:

Contract value; or

Continuation Net Purchase Payments.

If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation Date, the death benefit is equal to the contract value.

Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit

If the Continuing Spouse is age 80 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greatest of:

Contract value; or

Continuation Net Purchase Payments; or

Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary that occurred after the Continuation Date, but prior to the earlier of the Continuing Spouse’s 83rd birthday or date of death, plus any Continuation Purchase Payments received since that anniversary; and reduced for any withdrawals since that anniversary in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the applicable anniversary after the Continuation Date.

If the Continuing Spouse is age 81-85 on the Continuation Date, then the death benefit will be the Standard Death Benefit described above and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit fee will no longer be deducted as of the Continuation Date.

E-1

If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation Date, the death benefit is equal to contract value and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit fee will no longer be deducted as of the Continuation Date.

The following describes the standard death benefit and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit with election of a Living Benefit:

Standard Death Benefit

If the Continuing Spouse is age 85 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greater of:

Contract value; or

Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the first contract anniversary reduced by:

(i)

any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date, if the Living Benefit has not been terminated; or

(ii)

any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date, prior to the date the Living Benefit is terminated; and reduced for any withdrawals in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal on or after the date the Living Benefit is terminated.

If the Continuing Spouse is age 86 or older on the Continuation Date, the death benefit is equal to contract value.

Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit

If the Continuing Spouse is age 80 or younger on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the greatest of:

Contract value; or

Continuation Purchase Payments received prior to the first contract anniversary reduced by:

(i)

any Withdrawal Adjustments after the Continuation Date, if the Living Benefit has not been terminated; or

(ii)

Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary that occurred after the Continuation Date, but prior to the earlier of the Continuing Spouse’s 83rd birthday or date of death and reduced by:

(i)

any Withdrawal Adjustments since that contract anniversary, if the Living Benefit has not been terminated; or

(ii)

The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the applicable anniversary.

If the Continuing Spouse is age 81-85 on the Continuation Date, the death benefit will be the Standard Death Benefit with election of a Living Benefit, described above and the optional Maximum Anniversary Value death benefit fee will no longer be deducted as of the Continuation Date.

We reserve the right to modify, suspend or terminate the Spousal Continuation provision (in its entirety or any component) at any time for prospectively issued contracts.

E-2

Appendix F – Death Benefits and Spousal Continuation Death Benefits for Contracts Issued Prior to January 23, 2012

The Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit is no longer available for election. If your contract was issued prior to January 23, 2012 and you elected the optional Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit, the following provisions are applicable to the benefit you elected.

Optional Combination HV & Roll-Up Death Benefit

If you elected the Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit, you may not elect any available Fixed Accounts and you cannot change the election thereafter at any time. The fee for the optional Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit is 0.65% of the average daily net asset value allocated to the Variable Portfolios. You may pay for this optional death benefit and your Beneficiary may never receive the benefit once you begin the Income Phase. The Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit may only have been elected prior to your 76th birthday at contract issue. It was not available for election in Washington.

The death benefit is the greatest of:

Contract value; or

The Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary prior to the earlier of your 85th birthday or date of death, plus Purchase Payments received since that anniversary and reduced for any withdrawals since that anniversary in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the applicable contract anniversary.

Net Purchase Payments received prior to your 80th birthday accumulated at 5% through the earliest of:

15 years after the contract date; or

The day before your 80th birthday; or

The date of death,

adjusted for Net Purchase Payments received after the timeframes outlined in (a)-(c). Net Purchase Payments received after the timeframes outlined in (a)-(c) will not accrue at 5%.

Combination HV & Roll-Up Death Benefit Payable Upon Continuing Spouse’s Death

If the original Owner elected the optional Combination HV& Roll-Up Death Benefit and the Continuing Spouse continues the contract on the Continuation Date before their 85th birthday and does not terminate this optional death benefit, the death benefit will be the greatest of:

Contract value; or

Maximum anniversary value on any contract anniversary that occurred after the Continuation

Date, but prior to the earlier of the Continuing Spouse’s 85th birthday or date of death, plus any Continuation Purchase Payments received since that anniversary and reduced for any withdrawals since that anniversary in the same proportion that the withdrawal reduced the contract value on the date of such withdrawal. The anniversary value for any year is equal to the contract value on the applicable contract anniversary after the Continuation Date.

Continuation Net Purchase Payments received prior to the Continuing Spouse’s 80th birthday accumulated at 5% through the earliest of:

15 years after the contract date; or

The day before the Continuing Spouse’s 80th birthday; or

The Continuing Spouse’s date of death,

adjusted for Continuation Net Purchase Payments received after the timeframes outlined in (a)-(c). Continuation Net Purchase Payments received after the timeframes outlined in (a)-(c) will not accrue at 5%.

If the Continuing Spouse is age 85 or older on the Continuation Date, the death benefit is equal to contract value and the optional Combination HV & Roll-Up Death Benefit fee will no longer be deducted.

If the Continuing Spouse terminates the Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit on the Continuation Date, the standard death benefit for the Continuing Spouse applies upon his/her death and the fee for the Combination HV & Roll-Up death benefit no longer applies.

F-1

Appendix G – Death Benefit Examples

The following examples demonstrate how market performance, subsequent Purchase Payments, and withdrawals impact the death benefit.

The examples are based on a hypothetical contract over an extended period of time and do not assume any specific rate of return nor do they represent how your contract will actually perform.

Examples 1 through 3 below assume election of Standard Death Benefit without a living benefit.

Example 1: Initial Values

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

•

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

•

Owner age 65 on the Issue Date

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Contract Value	Net Purchase Payments	Standard Death Benefit
Issue Date	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000

Example 2: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 1 above, in addition to the following:

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first Contract Year = $60,000.

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the second Contract Year = $90,000.

•

No withdrawals taken in the first 2 Contract Years.

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Assumed Contract Value	Net Purchase Payments	Standard Death Benefit
Contract Date	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000
Year 1	$60,000	$165,000	$160,000	$165,000
1st Anniversary	–	$155,000	$160,000	$160,000
Year 2	$90,000	$245,000	$250,000	$250,000
2nd Anniversary	–	$260,000	$250,000	$260,000

The values of the death benefit are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments and the Contract Value at the time the death benefit is being calculated.

•

The Net Purchase Payments is recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase Payment is received.

Example 3: Impact of withdrawals on Net Purchase Payments

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1 and 2 above, in addition to the following:

•

A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken in the third Contract Year.

•

A withdrawal of $23,000 was taken in the fourth Contract Year.

Values as of	Assumed Contract Value	Withdrawal Taken	Contract Value After Withdrawal	Net Purchase Payments	Standard Death Benefit
Year 3	$300,000	$15,000	$285,000	$237,500	$285,000
3rd Anniversary	$265,000	–	$265,000	$237,500	$265,000
Year 4	$230,000	$23,000	$207,000	$213,750	$213,750
4th Anniversary	$220,000	–	$220,000	$213,750	$220,000

•

The Net Purchase Payments (“NPP”) reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by withdrawal amount.

○

In year 3, the reduction proportion was 5.0% ($15,000/$300,000); the reduced NPP was $237,500 [$250,000 × (1 – 5.0%)]. The standard death benefit was $285,000.

G-1

○

In year 4, the reduction proportion was 10.0% ($23,000/$230,000); the reduced NPP was $213,750 [$237,500 × (1 – 10.0%)]. The standard death benefit was $213,750.

Note: In year 3 the reduction proportion of 5.0% has less impact to the Net Purchase Payments because Contract Value was greater than NPP: The $15,000 withdrawal reduced NPP by $12,500. Compared to year 4, the reduction proportion of 10.0% has a higher impact because Contract Value was less than the NPP: The $23,000 withdrawal reduced NPP by $23,750.

Examples 4 through 6 below assume election of Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit without a living benefit.

Example 4: Initial Values

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

•

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

•

Owner age 65 on the Issue Date

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Contract Value	Net Purchase Payments	Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
Issue Date	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000

Example 5: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 4 above, in addition to the following:

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first Contract Year = $60,000.

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the second Contract Year = $90,000.

•

No withdrawals taken in the first 2 Contract Years.

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Assumed Contract Value	Anniversary Value	Net Purchase Payments	Maximum Anniversary Value	Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
Issue Date	$100,000	$100,000	–	$100,000	–	$100,000
Year 1	$60,000	$165,000	–	$160,000	–	$165,000
1st Anniversary	–	$155,000	$155,000	$160,000	$155,000	$160,000
Year 2	$90,000	$245,000	–	$250,000	$245,000	$250,000
2nd Anniversary	–	$260,000	$260,000	$250,000	$260,000	$260,000

The values of the death benefit are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments and locking in the higher Anniversary Values as follows:

•

The Net Purchase Payments (“NPP”) and Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit are recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase Payment is received.

○

In year 1, the $60,000 subsequent Purchase Payment increased NPP and Maximum Anniversary Value (“MAV”), however the contract value was greater; the MAV death benefit was $165,000.

○

At 1st anniversary, NPP = $160,000 and MAV locks in at the contract anniversary value of $155,000; the MAV death benefit was $160,000.

•

The Maximum Anniversary Value is increased to a Higher Anniversary Value on each Benefit Year Anniversary if the Anniversary Value is greater than the current Maximum Anniversary Value.

○

In year 2, the $90,000 subsequent Purchase Payment increased NPP to $250,000 and MAV to $245,000; the MAV death benefit was $250,000.

○

At 2nd anniversary, contract value was locked in and MAV increased to $260,000; MAV death benefit was $260,000 while the NPP remained at $250,000; the MAV death benefit was $260,000.

G-2

Example 6: Impact of withdrawals on Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 4 and 5 above, in addition to the following:

•

A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken in the third Contract Year.

•

A withdrawal of $23,000 was taken in the fourth Contract Year.

Values as of	Assumed Contract Value	Withdrawal Taken	Anniversary Value	Net Purchase Payments	Maximum Anniversary Value	Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
Year 3	$300,000	$15,000	–	$237,500	$247,000	$285,000
3rd Anniversary	$265,000	–	$265,000	$237,500	$265,000	$265,000
Year 4	$230,000	$23,000	–	$213,750	$238,500	$238,500
4th Anniversary	$220,000	–	$220,000	$213,750	$238,500	$238,500

•

The Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value are reduced in the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the withdrawal amount.

○

In year 3, the reduction proportion was 5.0% ($15,000/$300,000); the reduced NPP was $237,500 [$250,000 × (1 – 5.0%)]; the reduced Maximum Anniversary Value was $247,000 [$260,000 × (1 – 5.0%)]; the MAV death benefit was $285,000 ($300,000 – $15,000).

○

In year 4, the reduction proportion was 10.0% ($23,000/$230,000); the reduced NPP was $213,750 [$237,500 × (1 – 10.0%)]; the reduced Maximum Anniversary Value was $238,500 [$265,000 × (1 – 10.0%)]; the MAV death benefit was $238,500.

Note: In year 3 the reduction proportion of 5.0% has less impact to the Maximum Anniversary Value because Contract Value was greater than MAV: The $15,000 withdrawal reduced Maximum Anniversary Value by $13,000. Compared to year 4, the reduction proportion of 10.0% has a higher impact because Contract Value was less than the MAV: The $23,000 withdrawal reduced MAV by $26,500.

Examples 7 through 10 below assume election of Standard Death Benefit and Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1.

Example 7: Initial Values

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

•

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

•

Owner/covered person age 65 on the Issue Date

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Contract Value	Net Purchase Payments	Standard Death Benefit
Issue Date	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000

Example 8: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 7 above, in addition to the following:

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first Contract Year = $150,000.

•

No withdrawals taken

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Assumed Contract Value	Net Purchase Payments	Standard Death Benefit
Contract Date	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000
Year 1	$150,000	$245,000	$250,000	$250,000
1st Anniversary	–	$270,000	$250,000	$270,000
2nd Anniversary	–	$287,000	$250,000	$287,000

The values of the death benefit are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments and the Contract Value at the time the death benefit is calculated.

•

The Net Purchase Payments is recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase Payment is received.

○

In year 1, the $150,000 subsequent Purchase Payment increased NPP; the Standard death benefit was $250,000

G-3

○

At 1st anniversary contract value increased; the Standard death benefit was $270,000.

○

At 2nd anniversary contract value increased; the Standard death benefit was $287,000.

Example 9: Impact of Taking Withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 7 and 8 above, in addition to the following:

•

A withdrawal less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) is taken in the fourth and fifth Contract Years.

Values as of	Assumed Contract Value	Withdrawal Taken	Anniversary Value	Assumed Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount	Net Purchase Payments	Standard Death Benefit
3rd Anniversary	$310,000	–	$310,000	$18,600	$250,000	$310,000
Year 4	$312,000	$15,500	–	$18,600	$234,500	$296,500
4th Anniversary	$310,000	–	$310,000	$18,647	$234,500	$310,000
Year 5	$302,000	$15,539	–	$18,647	$218,961	$286,461
5th Anniversary	$305,000	–	$305,000	$18,693	$218,961	$305,000

Withdrawals up to MAWA reduce the Net Purchase Payments dollar-for-dollar.

•

In year 4, an amount of $15,500 was withdrawn.

○

In year 4, the NPP was $234,500 ($250,000 – $15,500); the Contract Value after the Withdrawal was $296,500 ($312,000 – $15,500); the Standard death benefit was $296,500.

•

In year 5, an amount of $15,539 was withdrawn.

○

In year 5, the NPP was $218,961 ($234,500 – $15,539); the Contract Value after the Withdrawal was $286,461 ($302,000 – $15,539); the Standard death benefit was $286,461.

Example 10: Impact of Taking Excess Withdrawals (in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount)

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 7, 8, and 9 above, in addition to the following:

•

Withdrawals in excess of Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount are taken in the sixth and seventh Contract Years.

Values as of	Assumed Contract Value	Withdrawal Taken	Anniversary Value	Assumed Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount	Net Purchase Payments	Standard Death Benefit
5th Anniversary	$305,000	–	$305,000	$18,693	$218,961	$305,000
Year 6	$305,000	$24,924	–	$18,286	$195,910	$280,076
6th Anniversary	$280,000	–	$280,000	$18,286	$195,910	$280,000
Year 7	$290,000	$24,382	–	$17,876	$173,639	$265,618
7th Anniversary	$260,000	–	$260,000	$17,876	$173,639	$260,000

•

Withdrawals up to the MAWA reduce Net Purchase Payments dollar-for-dollar first, then the Withdrawal amount in Excess of MAWA reduces NPP proportionately.

○

In year 6, the reduction proportion was 2.1763% [($24,924 – $18,693)/($305,000 – $18,693)]; the NPP was reduced to $195,910 [($218,961 – $18,693) × (1 – 2.1763%)]; the Standard death benefit was $280,076.

○

In year 7, the reduction proportion was 2.2433% [($24,382 – $18,286)/($290,000 – $18,286)]; the NPP was reduced to $173,639 [($195,910 – $18,286) × (1 – 2.2433%)]; the Standard death benefit was $265,618.

Examples 11 through 14 below assume election of Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit and Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1.

G-4

Example 11: Initial Values

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

•

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

•

Owner/covered person age 65 on the Issue Date

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Contract Value	Net Purchase Payments	Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
Issue Date	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000

Example 12: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 11 above, in addition to the following:

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first Contract Year = $100,000.

•

No withdrawals taken.

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Assumed Contract Value	Anniversary Value	Net Purchase Payments	Maximum Anniversary Value	Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
Issue Date	$100,000	$100,000	–	$100,000	–	$100,000
Year 1	$100,000	$250,000	–	$200,000	–	$250,000
1st Anniversary	–	$270,000	$270,000	$200,000	$270,000	$270,000
2nd Anniversary	–	$287,000	$287,000	$200,000	$287,000	$287,000
3rd Anniversary	–	$310,000	$310,000	$200,000	$310,000	$310,000

The values of the death benefit are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments and locking in the higher Anniversary Values as follows:

•

The Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value (“MAV”) Death Benefit are recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase Payment is received.

○

In year 1, the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment increased NPP; the MAV death benefit was $250,000.

○

At 1st anniversary contract value increased; NPP remained unchanged and MAV was the anniversary value of $270,000; the MAV death benefit was $270,000.

○

At 2nd anniversary contract value increased; NPP remained unchanged and MAV was the anniversary value of $287,000; the MAV death benefit was $287,000.

○

At 3rd anniversary contract value increased; NPP remained unchanged and MAV was the anniversary value of $310,000; the MAV death benefit was $310,000.

G-5

Example 13: Impact of Taking Withdrawals up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 11 and 12 above, in addition to the following:

•

A withdrawal of less than Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount is taken in the fourth and fifth Contract Years.

Values as of	Assumed Contract Value	Withdrawal Taken	Anniversary Value	Assumed Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount	Net Purchase Payments	Maximum Anniversary Value	Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
3rd Anniversary	$310,000	–	$310,000	$18,600	$200,000	$310,000	$310,000
Year 4	$312,000	$15,500	–	$18,600	$184,500	$294,500	$296,500
4th Anniversary	$310,000	–	$310,000	$18,786	$184,500	$310,000	$310,000
Year 5	$302,000	$15,539	–	$18,786	$168,961	$294,461	$294,461
5th Anniversary	$305,000	–	$305,000	$18,979	$168,961	$305,000	$305,000

Withdrawals up to MAWA reduce Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value dollar-for-dollar.

•

In year 4, an amount of $15,500 was withdrawn.

○

In year 4, the NPP was $184,500 ($200,000 – $15,500); the MAV was $294,500 ($310,000 – $15,500); the Contract Value after the withdrawal was $296,500 ($312,000 – $15,500); the MAV death benefit was $296,500.

•

In year 5, an amount of $15,539 was withdrawn.

○

In year 5, the NPP was $168,961 ($184,500 – $15,539); the MAV was $294,461 ($310,000 – $15,539); the MAV death benefit was $294,461.

Example 14: Impact of Taking Excess Withdrawals (in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount)

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 11, 12, and 13 above, in addition to the following:

•

Withdrawals in excess of Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount are taken in the sixth and seventh Contract Years.

Values as of	Assumed Contract Value	Withdrawal Taken	Anniversary Value	Assumed Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount	Net Purchase Payments	Maximum Anniversary Value	Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit
5th Anniversary	$305,000	–	$305,000	$18,979	$168,961	$305,000	$305,000
Year 6	$305,000	$24,924	–	$18,584	$146,865	$280,076	$280,076
6th Anniversary	$280,000	–	$280,000	$18,584	$146,865	$280,076	$280,076
Year 7	$290,000	$24,382	–	$18,187	$125,540	$255,906	$265,618
7th Anniversary	$260,000	–	$260,000	$18,187	$125,540	$260,000	$274,093

The values of the Death Benefit are impacted by taking withdrawals in excess of the MAWA as follows:

•

First, withdrawals up to the MAWA reduce Net Purchase Payments and Maximum Anniversary Value dollar-for-dollar.

•

Second, Excess Withdrawals above MAWA reduces NPP and MAV proportionately.

○

In year 6, the reduction proportion was 2.0786% [($24,924 – $18,979)/($305,000 – $18,979)]; the NPP was reduced to $146,865 [($168,961 – $18,979) × (1 – 2.0786%)]; the MAV reduced to $280,076 [($305,000 – $18,979) × (1 – 2.0786%)]; the MAV death benefit was $280,076.

○

In year 7, the reduction proportion was 2.1361% [($24,382 – $18,584)/($290,000 – $18,584)]; the NPP was reduced to $125,540 [($146,865 – $18,584) × (1 – 2.1361%)]; the MAV reduced to $255,906 [($280,076 – $18,584) × (1 – 2.1361%)]; the MAV death benefit was $265,618 ($290,000 – $24,382).

G-6

Appendix H – OPTIONAL LIVING benefits examples

The following examples demonstrate how increases to the Income Base and withdrawals taken from the contract affect the values and benefits of the currently offered Living Benefits. The examples are based on a hypothetical contract over an extended period of time and do not assume any specific rate of return nor do they represent how your contract will actually perform.

Examples 1 through 5 below assume election of Polaris Income Plus Income Option 1 (one Covered Person).

Example 1: Initial Values

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

•

Benefit Effective Date = contract issue date

•

Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

•

Income Credit Percentage = 5.50%

•

Covered Person = Owner age 65 on the Benefit Effective Date

•

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage = 6.00%

Values as of	Purchase Payments Invested	Contract Value	Income Base	Income Credit Base	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
Benefit Effective Date	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$6,000

•

Income Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

•

Income Credit Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

•

Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount = Income Base x Maximum Annual Withdrawal Percentage

= $100,000 x 6.00% = $6,000

Example 2: Impact of Adding Subsequent Purchase Payments and Attaining Higher Anniversary Values

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Example 1 above, in addition to the following:

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the first contract year = $60,000.

•

Subsequent Purchase Payment invested in the second contract year = $90,000.

•

No withdrawals taken in the first 2 contract years.

Values as of	Purchase Payment Invested	Assumed Contract Value	Anniversary Value	Income Base	Income Credit Base	Income Credit	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
Benefit Effective Date	$100,000	$100,000	—	$100,000	$100,000	—	$6,000
Year 1	$600,000	$165,000	—	$160,000	$160,000	—	$9,600
1st Anniversary	—	$170,000	$170,000	$170,000	$170,000	$8,800	$10,200
Year 2	$90,000	$255,000	—	$260,000	$260,000	—	$15,600
2nd Anniversary	—	$287,000	$287,000	$287,000	$310,000	$14,300	$17,220

The values of the feature are impacted by adding subsequent Purchase Payments and attaining Higher Anniversary

Values as follows:

•

The Income Base, Income Credit Base and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) are recalculated at the time each subsequent Purchase Payment is received.

•

The Income Base and Income Credit Base are increased to a Higher Anniversary Value on each anniversary if the Anniversary Value is greater than the current Income Base plus the Income Credit; and the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) is recalculated based on the value of the new Income Base.

○

In year 1, a subsequent Purchase Payment of $60,000 was added. The Income Base and Income Credit Base were increased to $160,000 ($100,000 + $60,000); and the MAWA was increased to $9,600 ($160,000 x 6.00%).

H-1

○

On the 1st anniversary, the Income Base and Income Credit Base were increased to $170,000 ($170,000 is greater than $160,000 + $8,800 Income Credit); and the MAWA was increased to $10,200 ($170,000 x 6.00%).

○

In year 2, a subsequent Purchase Payment of $90,000 was added. The Income Base and Income Credit Base were increased to $260,000 ($170,000 + $90,000); and the MAWA was increased to $15,600 ($260,000 x 6.00%).

○

On the 2nd anniversary, the Income Base and Income Credit Base were increased to $287,000 ($287,000 is greater than $260,000 + $14,300 Income Credit); and the MAWA was increased to $17,220 ($287,000 x 6.00%).

Example 3: Impact of Taking Withdrawals (up to the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount)

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1 and 2 above, in addition to the following:

•

Withdrawals of 5% of Income Base taken in the fourth and fifth contract years.

Values as of	Withdrawal Taken	Assumed Contract Value	Anniversary Value	Income Base	Income Credit Base	Income Credit	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
2nd Anniversary	—	$287,000	$287,000	$287,000	$287,000	$14,300	$17,220
Year 3	—	$300,000	—	$287,000	$287,000	—	$17,220
3rd Anniversary	—	$310,000	$310,000	$310,000	$310,000	$15,785	$18,600
Year 4	$15,500	$312,000	—	$310,000	$310,000	—	$18,600
4th Anniversary	—	$311,000	$311,000	$311,550	$310,000	$1,550	$18,693
Year 5	$15,578	$302,000	—	$311,550	$310,000	—	$18,693
5th Anniversary	—	$305,000	$305,000	$313,100	$310,000	$1,550	$18,786

•

In year 4, $15,500 was withdrawn ($310,000 x 5%).

•

In year 5, $15,578 was withdrawn ($310,550 x 5%).

The values of the feature are impacted by withdrawals taken as follows:

•

The Income Base and Income Credit Base are not reduced because the amount of the withdrawal taken was less than the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”).

○

In year 4, $15,500 was withdrawn and is less than MAWA of $18,600.

○

In year 5, $15,578 was withdrawn and is less than MAWA of $18,693.

•

The Income Credit Percentage used to determine the amounts of the Income Credit added on the 4th and 5th anniversaries were reduced by the percent withdrawn (5.50% Income Credit Percentage – 5% withdrawal = 0.50% Income Credit Percentage).

Income Credit = $1,550 ($310,000 Income Credit Base x 0.50% Income Credit Percentage)

Note: When the Income Base is increased due to the addition of the Income Credit, the Income Credit Base is not increased. The Income Credit Base is increased by the addition of the subsequent Purchase Payments, and when the Income Base is increased to a Higher Anniversary Value (as shown in Example 2 above).

Example 4: Impact of Taking Excess Withdrawals (in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount)

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1, 2 and 3 above, in addition to the following:

•

Withdrawals of 8% of Income Base taken in the sixth and seventh contract years.

Values as of	Withdrawal Taken	Assumed Contract Value	Anniversary Value	Income Base	Income Credit Base	Income Credit	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount
5th Anniversary	—	$305,000	$305,000	$313,100	$310,000	$1,550	$18,786
Year 6	$25,048	$280,000	—	$305,594	$302,568	—	$18,336
6th Anniversary	—	$290,000	$290,000	$305,594	$302,568	$0	$18,336
Year 7	$24,448	$260,000	—	$297,865	$294,916	—	$17,872
7th Anniversary	—	$230,000	$230,000	$297,865	$294,916	$0	$17,872

H-2

The values of the feature are impacted by taking withdrawals in excess of the Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount (“MAWA”) as follows:

•

The Income Base and Income Credit Base are reduced by the same proportion by which the contract value is reduced by the amount in excess of the MAWA.

○

In year 6, the reduction proportion was 2.3973% [($25,048 - $18,786) / ($280,000 - $18,786)]; the Income Base was reduced to $305,594 [$313,100 x (1 – 2.3973%)]; the Income Credit Base was reduced to $302,568 [$310,000 x (1 – 2.3973%)]; and the MAWA was reduced to $18,336 ($305,594 x 6.00%).

○

In year 7, the reduction proportion was 2.5291% [($24,448 - $18,336) / ($260,000 - $18,336)]; the Income Base was reduced to $294,916 [$305,594 x (1 – 2.5291%)]; the Income Credit Base was reduced to $294,916 [$302,568 x (1 – 2.5291%)]; and the MAWA was reduced to $17,872 ($297,865 x 6.00%).

•

The Income Credit Percentage is reduced to 0% because the withdrawal taken was in excess of the MAWA.

•

The MAWA is recalculated based on the reduced Income Base.

Example 5: Protected Income Payment

The values shown below are based on the assumptions stated in Examples 1, 2, 3 and 4 above, in addition to the following:

•

Contract values as shown below and reduced to $0 in Year 11 due to market conditions.

•

No withdrawals taken after the seventh contract year.

Values as of	Assumed Contract Value	Anniversary Value	Income Base	Income Credit Base	Income Credit	Maximum Annual Withdrawal Amount	Protected Income Payment
7th Anniversary	$230,000	$230,000	$297,865	$294,916	$0	$17,872	—
8th Anniversary	$150,000	$150,000	$314,086	$294,916	$16,220	$18,845	—
9th Anniversary	$100,000	$100,000	$330,306	$294,916	$16,220	$19,818	—
10th Anniversary	$50,000	$50,000	$346,526	$294,916	$16,220	$20,792	—
Year 11	$0	$0	$346,526	$294,916	—	$20,792	—
11th Anniversary	$0	$0	$346,526	$294,916	—	—	$13,861

•

The Protected Income Payment of $13,861 ($346,526 x 4%) will be paid for the lifetime of the Covered Person.

H-3

The Statement of Additional Information (SAI) contains additional information about the contract, the Company, and the Separate Account, including financial statements. The SAI is dated the same date as this prospectus, and the SAI is incorporated by reference into this prospectus. You may request a free copy of the SAI or submit inquiries by:

•

Mailing: Annuity Service Center, P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570

•

Calling: (855) 421-2692

•

Visiting: www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses

You may also obtain other information about the Separate Account on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic request at the following email address: [email protected].

EDGAR Contract Identifier: C000124642

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FLEXIBLE PREMIUM DEFERRED VARIABLE ANNUITY CONTRACT

ISSUED BY

AMERICAN GENERAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY

IN CONNECTION WITH

VARIABLE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

POLARIS CHOICE IV VARIABLE ANNUITY

This Statement of Additional Information is not a prospectus; it should be read with the prospectus, dated May 1, 2026, relating to the annuity contracts described above. A copy of the prospectus may be obtained without charge by calling (855) 421-2692, visiting www.corebridgefinancial.com/ProductProspectuses, or writing us at:

AMERICAN GENERAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
ANNUITY SERVICE CENTER
P.O. BOX 15570
AMARILLO, TEXAS 79105-5570

May 1, 2026

TABLE OF CONTENTS

	Page
Separate Account and the Company	3
Custodian	4
General Account	4
Information Regarding the Use of the Volatility Index (“VIX”)	5
Annuity Income Payments	5
Annuity Unit Values	6
Broker-Dealer Firms Receiving Revenue Sharing Payments	8
Distribution of Contracts	8
Financial Statements	9

-2-

Separate Account and the Company

American General Life Insurance Company (“AGL” or the “Company”) is a stock life insurance company organized under the laws of the State of Texas on April 11, 1960. AGL is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of Corebridge Financial, Inc. (“Corebridge”). On March 26, 2026, Corebridge and Equitable Holdings, Inc., announced that they entered into a definitive agreement to combine in an all-stock merger. Under the terms of the merger agreement, both companies will become wholly owned subsidiaries of a newly formed holding company, which will be renamed “Equitable Holdings, Inc.” upon the closing of the transaction. The transaction is expected to close by year-end 2026, subject to certain regulatory approvals and other customary closing conditions. Upon completion of the transaction, AGL will be an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the new Equitable Holdings, Inc. AGL offers individual term and universal life insurance, as well as fixed, variable and registered index-linked annuities in all states except in New York.

On December 31, 2012, SunAmerica Annuity and Life Assurance Company (“SunAmerica Annuity”), American General Assurance Company (“AGAC”), American General Life and Accident Insurance Company (“AGLA”), American General Life Insurance Company of Delaware (“AGLD”), SunAmerica Life Insurance Company (“SALIC”) and Western National Life Insurance Company, (“WNL”), affiliates of American General Life Insurance Company, merged with and into American General Life Insurance Company (“Merger”). Prior to this date, the Polaris Choice IV contracts were issued by SunAmerica Annuity in all states except New York.

Variable Separate Account (“Separate Account”) was originally established by Anchor National Life Insurance Company (“Anchor National”) under Arizona law on January 1, 1996 when it assumed the Separate Account, originally established under California law on June 25, 1981. Effective March 1, 2003, Anchor National changed its name to AIG SunAmerica Life Assurance Company (“SunAmerica Life”). Effective July 20, 2009, SunAmerica Life changed its name to SunAmerica Annuity and Life Assurance Company. These were name changes only and did not affect the substance of any contract. Prior to December 31, 2012, the Separate Account was a separate account of SunAmerica Annuity. On December 31, 2012, and in conjunction with the merger of AGL and SunAmerica Annuity, the Separate Account was transferred to and became a Separate Account of AGL under Texas law.

The Separate Account meets the definition of a “Separate Account” under the federal securities laws and is registered with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940. This registration does not involve supervision of the management of the Separate Account or the Company by the SEC.

The assets of the Separate Account are the property of the Company. However, the assets of the Separate Account, equal to its reserves and other contract liabilities, are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business the Company may conduct. Income, gains, and losses, whether or not realized, from assets allocated to the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to other income, gains, or losses of the Company.

The Separate Account is divided into Variable Portfolios, with the assets of each Variable Portfolio invested in the shares of one of the Underlying Funds. The Company does not guarantee the investment performance of the Separate Account, its Variable Portfolios or the Underlying Funds. Values allocated to the Separate Account and the amount of variable annuity income payments will vary with the values of shares of the Underlying Funds, and are also reduced by contract charges and fees.

The basic objective of a variable annuity contract is to provide variable annuity income payments which will be to some degree responsive to changes in the economic environment, including inflationary forces and changes in rates of return available from various types of investments. The contract is designed to seek to accomplish this objective by providing that variable annuity income payments will reflect the investment performance of the Separate Account with respect to amounts allocated to it both before and after the Annuity Date. Since the Separate Account is always fully invested in shares of the Underlying Funds, its investment performance reflects the investment performance of those entities. The values of such shares held by the Separate Account fluctuate and are subject to the risks of changing economic conditions as well as the risk inherent in the ability of the Underlying Funds’ management to make necessary changes in their funds to anticipate changes in economic conditions. Therefore, the owner bears the entire investment risk that the basic objectives of the contract may not be realized, and that the adverse effects of inflation may not be lessened. There can be no assurance that the aggregate amount of variable annuity income payments will equal or exceed the Purchase Payments made with respect to a particular account for the reasons described above, or because of the premature death of an Annuitant.

-3-

Another important feature of the contract related to its basic objective is the Company’s promise that the dollar amount of variable annuity income payments made during the lifetime of the Annuitant will not be adversely affected by the actual mortality experience of the Company or by the actual expenses incurred by the Company in excess of expense deductions provided for in the contract (although the Company does not guarantee the amounts of the variable annuity income payments).

Custodian

The Company acts as custodian of the Separate Account. We have custody of all assets and cash of the Separate Account and handle the collection of proceeds of shares of the Underlying Funds bought and sold by the Separate Account.

General Account

The general account is made up of all of the general assets of the Company other than those allocated to the Separate Account or any other segregated asset account of the Company. A Purchase Payment may be allocated to the available fixed account options and/or available DCA fixed accounts in connection with the general account, as elected by the owner at the time of purchasing a contract or when making a subsequent Purchase Payment. Assets supporting amounts allocated to fixed account options become part of the Company’s general account assets and are available to fund the claims of all classes of customers of the Company, as well as of its creditors. Accordingly, all of the Company’s assets held in the general account will be available to fund the Company’s obligations under the contracts as well as such other claims.

The Company will invest the assets of the general account in the manner chosen by the Company and allowed by applicable state laws regarding the nature and quality of investments that may be made by life insurance companies and the percentage of their assets that may be committed to any particular type of investment. In general, these laws permit investments, within specified limits and subject to certain qualifications, in federal, state and municipal obligations, corporate bonds, preferred and common stocks, real estate mortgages, real estate and certain other investments.

-4-

Information Regarding the Use of the Volatility Index (“VIX”)

This variable annuity is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor’s Financial Services LLC (“S&P”) or the Chicago Board Options Exchange, Incorporated (“CBOE”). S&P and CBOE make no representation, condition or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of this variable annuity or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in this variable annuity or in the ability of the CBOE Volatility Index (the “VIX”) track market performance. S&P’s and CBOE’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P, CBOE and the VIX which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P without regard to the Company or this variable annuity. S&P has no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the owners of this variable annuity into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the VIX. S&P and CBOE are not responsible for and have not participated in the determination of the timing of, prices at, or quantities of this variable annuity to be issued or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which this variable annuity is to be converted into cash. S&P and CBOE have no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of this variable annuity.

Neither S&P, its affiliates nor their third party licensors, including CBOE, guarantee the adequacy, accuracy, timeliness or completeness of the VIX or any data included therein or any communications, including but not limited to, oral or written communications (including electronic communications) with respect thereto. S&P, its affiliates and their third party licensors, including CBOE, shall not be subject to any damages or liability for any errors, omissions or delays therein. S&P and CBOE make no express or implied warranties, and expressly disclaim all warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or use with respect to the marks, the VIX or any data included therein. Without limiting any of the foregoing, in no event whatsoever shall S&P, its affiliates or their third party licensors, including CBOE, be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, punitive or consequential damages, including but not limited to, loss of profits, trading losses, lost time or goodwill, even if they have been advised of the possibility of such damages, whether in contract, tort, strict liability or otherwise.

“Standard & Poor’s®”, “S&P®”, “S&P 500®” and “Standard & Poor’s 500™” are trademarks of Standard & Poor’s Financial Services LLC (“S&P”) and have been licensed for use by the Company. “CBOE”, “CBOE Volatility Index” and “VIX” is a trademark of the Chicago Board Options Exchange, Incorporated and has been licensed for use by S&P.

Annuity Income Payments

Initial Monthly Annuity Income Payments

The initial monthly annuity income payment is determined by applying separately that portion of the contract value allocated to the fixed account options and the Variable Portfolio(s), less any premium tax if applicable, and then applying it to the annuity table specified in the contract for fixed and variable annuity income payments. Those tables are based on a set amount per $1,000 of proceeds applied. The appropriate rate must be determined by the sex (except where, as in the case of certain Qualified contracts and other employer-sponsored retirement plans, such classification is not permitted) and age of the Annuitant and designated second person, if any, and the annuity income option selected.

The dollars applied are then divided by 1,000 and the result multiplied by the appropriate annuity factor appearing in the table to compute the amount of the first monthly annuity income payment. In the case of a variable annuity, that amount is divided by the value of an Annuity Unit as of the Annuity Date to establish the number of Annuity Units representing each variable annuity income payment. The number of Annuity Units determined for the first monthly variable annuity income payment remains constant for the second and subsequent monthly variable annuity income payments, assuming that no reallocation of contract values is made.

Subsequent Monthly Annuity Income Payments

For fixed annuity income payments, the amount of the second and each subsequent monthly fixed annuity income payment is the same as that determined above for the first fixed monthly annuity income payment.

For variable annuity income payments, the amount of the second and each subsequent monthly variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units, as determined in connection with the determination of the initial monthly variable annuity income payment, above, by the Annuity Unit value as of the day preceding the date on which each monthly variable annuity income payment is due.

-5-

Annuity Unit Values

The value of an Annuity Unit is determined independently for each Variable Portfolio.

The annuity tables contained in the contract are based on a 3.5% per annum assumed investment rate. If the actual net investment rate experienced by a Variable Portfolio exceeds 3.5%, variable annuity income payments derived from allocations to that Variable Portfolio will increase over time. Conversely, if the actual rate is less than 3.5%, variable annuity income payments will decrease over time. If the net investment rate equals 3.5%, the variable annuity income payments will remain constant. If a higher assumed investment rate had been used, the initial monthly variable annuity income payment would be higher, but the actual net investment rate would also have to be higher in order for variable annuity income payments to increase (or not to decrease).

The payee receives the value of a fixed number of Annuity Units each month. The value of a fixed number of Annuity Units will reflect the investment performance of the Variable Portfolios elected, and the amount of each monthly variable annuity income payment will vary accordingly.

For each Variable Portfolio, the value of an Annuity Unit is determined by multiplying the Annuity Unit value for the preceding month by the Net Investment Factor for the month for which the Annuity Unit value is being calculated. The result is then multiplied by a second factor which offsets the effect of the assumed net investment rate of 3.5% per annum which is assumed in the annuity tables contained in the contract.

Net Investment Factor

The Net Investment Factor (“NIF”) is an index applied to measure the net investment performance of a Variable Portfolio from one day to the next. The NIF may be greater or less than or equal to one; therefore, the value of an Annuity Unit may increase, decrease or remain the same.

The NIF for any Variable Portfolio for a certain month is determined by dividing (a) by (b) where:

(a)

is the Accumulation Unit value of the Variable Portfolio determined as of the end of that month, and

(b)

is the Accumulation Unit value of the Variable Portfolio determined as of the end of the preceding month.

The NIF for a Variable Portfolio for a given month is a measure of the net investment performance of the Variable Portfolio from the end of the prior month to the end of the given month. A NIF of 1.000 results in no change; a NIF greater than 1.000 results in an increase; and a NIF less than 1.000 results in a decrease. The NIF is increased (or decreased) in accordance with the increases (or decreases, respectively) in the value of a share of the underlying fund in which the Variable Portfolio invests; it is also reduced by Separate Account asset charges.

Illustrative Example

Assume that one share of a given Variable Portfolio had an Accumulation Unit value of $11.46 as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) on the last business day in September; that its Accumulation Unit value had been $11.44 at the close of the NYSE on the last business day at the end of the previous month. The NIF for the month of September is:

NIF	=	($11.46/$11.44)
	=	1.00174825

The change in Annuity Unit value for a Variable Portfolio from one month to the next is determined in part by multiplying the Annuity Unit value at the prior month end by the NIF for that Variable Portfolio for the new month. In addition, however, the result of that computation must also be multiplied by an additional factor that takes into account, and neutralizes, the assumed investment rate of 3.5 percent per annum upon which the variable annuity income payment tables are based. For example, if the net investment rate for a Variable Portfolio (reflected in the NIF) were equal to the assumed investment rate, the variable annuity income payments should remain constant (i.e., the Annuity Unit value should not change). The monthly factor that neutralizes the assumed investment rate of 3.5 percent per annum is:

		(1/12)
1/	[(1.035)		]	=	0.99713732

-6-

In the example given above, if the Annuity Unit value for the Variable Portfolio was $10.103523 on the last business day in August, the Annuity Unit value on the last business day in September would have been:

$10.103523 x 1.00174825 x 0.99713732 = $10.092213

To determine the initial variable annuity income payment, the annuity income payment for variable annuitization is calculated based on our mortality expectations and an assumed investment rate (AIR) of 3.5%. Thus the initial variable annuity income payment is the same as the initial payment for a fixed interest payout annuity calculated at an effective rate of 3.5%.

The NIF measures the performance of the funds that are basis for the amount of future variable annuity income payments. This performance is compared to the monthly AIR, and if the rate of growth in the NIF is the same as the monthly AIR the payment remains the same as the prior month. If the rate of growth of the NIF is different than the AIR, then the payment is changed proportionately to the ratio NIF / (1+AIR), calculated on a monthly basis. If the NIF is less than the AIR, then this proportion is less than one and payments are decreased.

Variable Annuity Income Payments

Illustrative Example

Assume that a contract has all of its account value allocated to a single Variable Portfolio. As of the last valuation preceding the Annuity Date, the account was credited with 7543.2456 Accumulation Units, each having a value of $15.432655 (i.e., the account value is equal to 7543.2456 x $15.432655 = $116,412.31). Assume also that the Annuity Unit value for the Variable Portfolio on that same date is $13.256932, and that the Annuity Unit value on the day immediately prior to the second variable annuity income payment date is $13.327695.

The first variable annuity income payment is determined using the annuity factor tables specified in the contract. These tables supply monthly annuity income payment factors, determined by the sex, age of the Annuitant and annuity income option selected, for each $1,000 of applied contract value. If the applicable factor is 5.21 for the annuitant in this hypothetical example, the first variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the factor of $5.21 by the result of dividing the account value by $1,000:

First variable annuity income payment = $5.21 x ($116,412.31/$1000) = $606.51

The number of Annuity Units (which will be constant unless the account values is transferred to another account) is also determined at this time and is equal to the amount of the first variable annuity income payment divided by the value of an Annuity Unit on the day immediately prior to annuitization:

Annuity Units = $606.51/$13.256932 = 45.750404

The second variable annuity income payment is determined by multiplying the number of Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit value as of the day immediately prior to the second variable annuity payment due date:

Second variable annuity income payment = 45.750404 x $13.327695 = $609.75

The third and subsequent variable annuity income payments are computed in a manner similar to the second variable annuity income payment.

Note that the amount of the first variable annuity income payment depends on the contract value in the relevant Variable Portfolio on the Annuity Date and thus reflects the investment performance of the Variable Portfolio net of fees and charges during the Accumulation Phase. The amount of that payment determines the number of Annuity Units, which will remain constant during the Annuity Phase (assuming no transfers from the Variable Portfolio). The net investment performance of the Variable Portfolio during the Annuity Phase is reflected in continuing changes during this phase in the Annuity Unit value, which determines the amounts of the second and subsequent variable annuity income payments.

-7-

Broker-Dealer Firms Receiving Revenue Sharing Payments

The following list includes the names of member firms of FINRA (or their affiliated broker-dealers) that received a revenue sharing payment of more than $15,000 as of the calendar year ending December 31, 2025, from American General Life Insurance Company and The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York, both affiliated companies. Your registered representative can provide you with more information about the compensation arrangements that apply upon the sale of the Contract.

Ameriprise	MML Investors
Centaurus Financial, Inc	Osaic Institutions, Inc
Cetera Advisor Networks LLC	Osaic Wealth Inc
Cetera Advisors LLC	Primerica
Cetera Financial Institutions	Raymond James & Associates
Edward Jones	Stifel Nicolaus
Independent Financial Group	Wells Fargo Advisors PCG
Kestra Investment Services	Wells Fargo Advisors WBS

We will update this list annually; interim arrangements may not be reflected. You are encouraged to review the prospectus for each Underlying Fund for any other compensation arrangements pertaining to the distribution of Underlying Fund shares.

Certain broker dealers with which we have selling agreements are our affiliates. In an effort to promote the sale of our products, affiliated firms may pay their registered representatives additional cash incentives which may include but are not limited to bonus payments, expense payments, health and retirement benefits or the waiver of overhead costs or expenses in connection with the sale of the Contracts, that they would not receive in connection with the sale of contracts issued by unaffiliated companies.

Distribution of Contracts

The contracts are offered on a continuous basis through Corebridge Capital Services, Inc., located at 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302. Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. (“CCS”) is registered as a broker-dealer under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority. CCS is a wholly-owned subsidiary of AGL. No underwriting fees are paid in connection with the distribution of the contracts.

-8-

Financial Statements

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, located at 300 Madison Avenue New York, New York, 10017, serves as the independent registered public accounting firm for Variable Separate Account and American General Life Insurance Company (“AGL”).

You may obtain a free copy of these financial statements if you write us at our Annuity Service Center or by calling (855) 421-2692. The financial statements have also been filed with the SEC and can be obtained through its website at www.sec.gov.

The following financial statements incorporated by reference within the SAI included on the most recent Form N-VPFS filed with the SEC have been so incorporated in reliance on the reports of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, given on the authority of said firm as experts in auditing and accounting:

•

The Audited statement of assets and liabilities of Variable Separate Account of American General Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2025, and the related statements of operations and changes in net assets for each of the two years in the period then ended December 31, 2025.

•

The Audited Statutory Financial Statements and Supplemental Information of American General Life Insurance Company, which comprise the statutory statements of admitted assets, liabilities and capital and surplus as of December 31, 2025 and December 31, 2024, and the related statutory statements of operations, of changes in capital and surplus, and of cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2025.

The financial statements of AGL should be considered only as bearing on the ability of AGL to meet its obligation under the contracts.

-9-

Part C — Other Information

Item 27. Exhibits

Exhibit Number	Description	Location
(a)	Resolution Establishing Separate Account	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File Nos. 333-25473 and 811-03859, filed on April 18, 1997, Accession No. 0000950148-97-000989.
(b)	Custodian Agreements	Not Applicable
(c)(1)	Distribution Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 and Amendment No. 20, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 25, 2019, Accession No. 0001193125-19-119309.
(c)(2)	Selling Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430.
(d)(1)	AGL Individual Fixed and Variable Annuity Contract (AS-993 (12/10))	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430.
(d)(2)	AGL Variable Annuity Contract (AG-803 (7/13))	Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-198223 and 811-03859, filed on November 3, 2014, Accession No. 0000950123-14-010828.
(d)(3)	AGL Contract Data Page (AG-803-CIV (7/13))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 and Amendment No. 4, File Nos. 333-185784 and 811-03859, filed on December 28, 2015, Accession No. 000193125-15-414565.
(d)(4)	AGL Nursing Home Waiver Rider (A-7036-R1)	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-13-02952.
(d)(5)	AGL Optional Guaranteed Living Benefit Endorsement (ASE-6248 (9/09))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-13-02952.
(d)(6)	AGL Extended Legacy Program Guide (EXTLEGGEN.4REV.11.12)	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-13-02952.
(d)(7)	AGL Maximum Anniversary Value Optional Death Benefit Endorsement (ASE-6235 (12/10))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-13-02952.
(d)(8)	AGL Premium Plus Endorsement (ASE-6245 (12/08))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-13-02952.
(d)(9)	AGL Merger Endorsement (L8204 (7/12))	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430.
(d)(10)	Return of Purchase Payment Death Benefit Endorsement (AGE-8022 (7/13))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 5 and Amendment No. 5, File Nos. 333-185778 and 811-03859, filed on December 28, 2015, Accession No. 0001193125-15-414547.
(d)(11)	Maximum Anniversary Value Optional Death Benefit Endorsement (AGE-8023 (7/13))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 5 and Amendment No. 5, File Nos. 333-185778 and 811-03859, filed on December 28, 2015, Accession No. 0001193125-15-414547.
(d)(12)	AGL Optional Guaranteed Living Benefit Endorsement (AGE-8036 (11/15))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2016, Accession No. 0001193125-16-568243.
(d)(13)	AGL Extended Legacy Program Guide (EXTLEGGEN.8 Rev.7.15)	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2016, Accession No. 0001193125-16-568243.

Exhibit Number	Description	Location
(d)(14)	AGL Optional Return of Purchase Payment Death Benefit Endorsement (AGE-8022 (12/15))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 12 and Amendment No. 12, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 26, 2017, Accession No. 0001193125-17-138989.
(d)(15)	AGL Optional Maximum Anniversary Value Death Benefit Endorsement (AGE-8023 (12/15))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 12 and Amendment No. 12, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 26, 2017, Accession No. 0001193125-17-138989.
(d)(16)	AGL Optional Guaranteed Living Benefit Endorsement (Income Plus) (AGE-6248 (12/15))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 and Amendment No. 9, File Nos. 333-185790 and 811-09003, filed on April 27, 2017, Accession No. 0001193125-17-139853.
(e)	Application for Contract
(e)(1)	AGL Annuity Application (ASA-579 (5/12))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-13-02952.
(e)(2)	AGL Annuity Application (AGA-579 (12/14))	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 and Amendment No. 4, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on December 28, 2015, Accession No. 0001193125-15-414549.
(f)	Corporate Documents of Insurance Company
(f)(1)	Articles of Incorporation and all Amendments for American General Life Insurance Company	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed on February 21, 2024, Accession No. 0001193125-24-040282.
(f)(2)	By-Laws of American General Life Insurance Company, restated as of June 8, 2005	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 11 and Amendment No. 46, File Nos. 333-43264 and 811-08561, of American General Life Insurance Company Separate Account VL-R, filed on August 12, 2005, Accession No. 0001193125-05-165474.
(g)	Reinsurance Contract	Not Applicable
(h)	Participation Agreements
(h)(1)	SunAmerica Series Trust Fund Participation Agreement	Filed Herewith
(h)(2)	Lord Abbett Fund Participation Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-91860 and 811-03859, filed on October 28, 2002, Accession No. 0000898430-02-003844.
(h)(3)	American Funds Insurance Series and SunAmerica Series Trust Master-Feeder Fund Participation Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 2 and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-137892 and 811-03859, filed on April 26, 2007, Accession No. 0000950148-07-000101.
(h)(4)	Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust Fund Participation Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 5 and Amendment No. 6, File Nos. 333-137892 and 811-03859, filed on April 28, 2008, Accession No. 0000950148-08-000093.
(h)(5)	AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) Fund Participation Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 and Amendment No. 8, File Nos. 333-157199 and 811-03859, filed on August 25, 2010, Accession No. 0000950123-10-080861.
(h)(6)	Seasons Series Trust Fund Participation Agreement	Filed Herewith
(h)(7)	Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust Fund Participation Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 Form N-6 Registration Statement, Filed No. 333-90787, filed on December 19, 2003, Accession No. 0001193125-03-097054.
(h)(8)	Amendment to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust Fund Participation Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 7 and Amendment No. 7, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on April 29, 2016, Accession No. 0001193125-16-568243.
(h)(9)	Letters of Consent to the Assignment of the Fund Participation Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430.
(i)	Administrative Contracts	Not Applicable

Exhibit Number	Description	Location
(j)	Other Material Contracts
(j)(1)	Notice of Termination of Support Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 1, File Nos. 333-172003 and 811-03859, filed on April 27, 2011, Accession No. 0000950123-11-040077.
(j)(2)	Amended and Restated Unconditional Capital Maintenance Agreement between American International Group, Inc. and American General Life Insurance Company	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-185778 and 811-03859, filed on April 30, 2014, Accession No. 0000950123-14-004617.
(j)(3)	Agreement and Plan of Merger	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File Nos. 333-185762 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-12-014430.
(j)(4)	CMA Termination Agreement	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 and Amendment No. 3, File Nos. 333-185784 and 811-03859, filed on April 28, 2015, Accession No. 0001193125-15-153206.
(k)	Opinion and Consent of Counsel	Incorporated by reference to Initial Registration Statement, File Nos. 333-185784 and 811-03859, filed on January 2, 2013, Accession No. 0000950123-12-014439.
(l)	Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	Filed Herewith
(m)	Financial Statements Omitted	None
(n)	Initial Capitalization Agreement	Not Applicable
(o)	Form of Initial Summary Prospectus	Not Applicable
(p)	Power of Attorney — American General Life Insurance Company Directors	Incorporated by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 10 to Form N-4, File No. 333-277203, filed on October 24, 2025, Accession No. 0001193125-25-25000.
(q)	Letter Regarding Change in Certifying Accountant	Not Applicable
(r)	Historical Current Limits on Index Gains	Not Applicable

Item 28. Directors and Officers of the Insurance Company

The directors and principal officers of the American General Life Insurance Company are set forth below. The business address of each officer and director is 2727-A Allen Parkway, 3-D1, Houston, TX 77019, unless otherwise noted.

Names, Positions and Offices Held with the Insurance Company
Christopher B. Smith (7)	Director, Chairman of the Board and President
Christopher P. Filiaggi (7)	Director, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
Jonathan J. Novak (1)	Director, President, Institutional Markets
Bryan A. Pinsky (2)	Director, President, Individual Retirement and Life Insurance
Lisa M. Longino (7)	Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Investment Officer
David Ditillo (5)	Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer
Emily W. Gingrich (4)	Director, Senior Vice President, Chief Actuary and Corporate Illustration Actuary
Eric G. Tarnow	Director, Senior Vice President, Head of Life Insurance
Terri N. Fiedler (3)	Director
Elizabeth B. Cropper (7)	Executive Vice President and Chief Human Resources Officer
John P. Byrne III (3)	President, Financial Distributor
Steven D. (“Doug”) Caldwell, Jr. (7)	Executive Vice President and Chief Risk Officer
Christina M. Haley (2)	Senior Vice President, Individual Retirement Products
Patricia M. Schwartz (2)	Senior Vice President, Head of Valuation and Financial Reporting, and Appointed Actuary
Sai P. Raman (6)	Senior Vice President, Institutional Markets
Mallary L. Reznik (2)	Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Assistant Secretary
Jeannette N. Pina (7)	Senior Vice President, Corporate Secretary
Jonathan A. Gold (7)	Senior Vice President and Deputy Investment Officer

Names, Positions and Offices Held with the Insurance Company
Brigitte K. Lenz	Vice President and Controller
Jennifer Powell (3)	Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer, and 38a-1 Compliance Officer
Brian O. Moon (7)	Vice President and Treasurer
Mersini G. Keller	Vice President and Tax Officer
Angel R. Ramos	Vice President and Tax Officer
Aimy T. Tran (2)	Vice President, Product Filing
Tyra G. Wheatley	Vice President, Product Filing
Korey L. Dalton	Vice President
Christopher J. Hobson (2)	Vice President
Jennifer N. Miller	Vice President
Marjorie D. Brothers (3)	Assistant Secretary
Alison Chen (1)	Assistant Secretary
William Langston (7)	Assistant Secretary
Angela G. Bates (4)	Anti-Money Laundering and Economic Sanctions Compliance Officer
Joey D. Zhou (3)	Illustration Actuary
Michael F. Mulligan (1)	Head of International Pension Risk Transfer
Ethan D. Bronsnick (7)	Head of U.S. Pension Risk Transfer and Head of Structured Settlements
Aileen V. Apuy	Manager, State Filings
Connie C. Merer (1)	Assistant Manager, State Filings
Melissa H. Cozart (3)	Privacy Officer
Thomas Bartolomeo	Chief Information Security Officer

(1)

10880 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 1101, Los Angeles, CA 90024

(2)

21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland Hills, CA 91367

(3)

2919 Allen Parkway, Houston, TX 77019

(4)

1133 Avenue of the Americas, 33rd Floor, New York, NY 10036

(5)

3211 Shannon Road, Durham, NC 27707

(6)

401 Merritt 7, Norwalk, CT 06851

(7)

30 Hudson Street, Jersey City, NJ 07302

Item 29. Persons Controlled By or Under Common Control with the Insurance Company or the Registered Separate Account

The Registered Separate Account is a separate account of American General Life Insurance Company (“Insurance Company”). The Insurance Company is an indirect, wholly owned subsidiary of Corebridge Financial, Inc. (“Corebridge”). An organizational chart for Corebridge can be found as Exhibit 21 in Corebridge’s Form 10-K, SEC File No. 001-41504, Accession No. 0001889539-26-000022, filed on February 11, 2026. Exhibit 21 is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 30. Indemnification

Insofar as indemnification for liability arising under the Securities Act of 1933 (“Act”) may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registered Separate Account pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registered Separate Account has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registered Separate Account of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the Registered Separate Account in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registered Separate Account will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

American General Life Insurance Company

To the full extent authorized by law, AGL shall indemnify any person made, or threatened to be made, a party to an action or proceeding, whether criminal or civil, by reason of the fact that he, his testator or intestate is or was a director or officer of

the corporation or serves or served in any capacity in any other corporation at the request of AGL. Nothing contained herein shall affect any rights to indemnification to which corporate personnel other than directors and officers may be entitled by contract or otherwise under law.

Item 31. Principal Underwriter

(a) Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. acts as distributor for the following investment companies:

American General Life Insurance Company

Variable Separate Account

Variable Annuity Account Five

Variable Annuity Account Seven

Variable Annuity Account Nine

AG Separate Account D

AGL Separate Account I of AGL

AGL Separate Account VL-R

The United States Life Insurance Company in the City of New York

FS Variable Separate Account

FS Variable Annuity Account Five

USL Separate Account VL-R

USL Separate Account USL A

USL Separate Account RS

The Variable Annuity Life Insurance Company

Variable Annuity Life Insurance Co Separate Account A

VALIC Company I

(b) Directors, Officers and principal place of business:

Officer/Directors*	Position
Christina Nasta	Director, Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer
John P. Byrne III (1)	Director
Nicholas G. Intrieri	Director
Ryan Tapak	Director
Eric Taylor	Director
Cynthia L. Burnette (1)	Vice President, Chief Financial Officer, Chief Operations Officer, Treasurer and Controller
Michael Fortey (1)	Chief Compliance Officer
Jeannette N. Pina	Senior Vice President and Corporate Secretary
Mersini G. Keller	Vice President, Tax Officer
Anish Cheeran (1)	Vice President, Tax Officer
Angel Ramos (1)	Vice President, Tax Officer
Katarzyna Halasiewicz(1)	Vice President, Tax Officer
Mallary L. Reznik (2)	Vice President
Marjorie Brothers (1)	Assistant Secretary
Allison Chen (2)	Assistant Secretary
William Langston	Assistant Secretary

Unless otherwise indicated, the principal business address of Corebridge Capital Services, Inc. and of each of the above individuals is 30 Hudson Street, 16th Floor, Jersey City, NJ 07302.

(1) Principal business address 2919 Allen Parkway, Houston, TX 77019

(2) Principal business address 21650 Oxnard Street, Suite 750, Woodland Hills, CA 91367-4997

Item 32. Location of Accounts and Records

All records referenced under Section 31(a) of the 1940 Act, and Rules 31a-1 through 31a-3 thereunder, are maintained and in the custody of American General Life Insurance Company at its principal executive office located at 2727-A Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas 77019-2191 or at American General Life Insurance Company’s Annuity Service Center located at P.O. Box 15570, Amarillo, Texas 79105-5570.

Item 33. Management Services

Not Applicable.

Item 34. Fee Representation and Other Representations

Fee Representation

Insurance Company represents that the fees and charges to be deducted under the Contracts described in the prospectus contained in this Registration Statement, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Insurance Company in accordance with Section 26(f)(2)(A) of the Investment Company Act of 1940.

Other Representations

The Registered Separate Account hereby represents that it is relying on the No-Action Letter issued by the Division of Investment Management to the American Council of Life Insurance dated November 28, 1988 (Commission Ref. No. IP-6-88). Registered Separate Account has complied with conditions one through four on the No-Action Letter.

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, the Registrant, Variable Separate Account, certifies that it meets all of the requirements for effectiveness of this registration statement under rule 485(b) under the Securities Act and has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, duly authorized, in the City of Jersey City, and State of New Jersey on this 22nd day of April, 2026.

Variable Separate Account

(Registered Separate Account)

BY: AMERICAN GENERAL LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
(On behalf of the Registered Separate Account and itself)

BY: * CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI

CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI
DIRECTOR, SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
*CHRISTOPHER B. SMITH CHRISTOPHER B. SMITH	Director, Chairman of the Board and President (Principal Executive Officer)	April 22, 2026

*CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI CHRISTOPHER P. FILIAGGI	Director, Senior Vice President, and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer) (Principal Accounting Officer)	April 22, 2026

*TERRI N. FIEDLER TERRI N. FIEDLER	Director	April 22, 2026

*EMILY W. GINGRICH EMILY W. GINGRICH	Director	April 22, 2026

*LISA M. LONGINO LISA M. LONGINO	Director	April 22, 2026

*JONATHAN J. NOVAK JONATHAN J. NOVAK	Director	April 22, 2026

*BRYAN A. PINSKY BRYAN A. PINSKY	Director	April 22, 2026

*ERIC G. TARNOW ERIC G. TARNOW	Director	April 22, 2026

*BY: /s/ TRINA SANDOVAL TRINA SANDOVAL Attorney-in-Fact pursuant to Powers of Attorney filed previously and/or herewith.		April 22, 2026

ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS

SUNAMERICA SERIES TRUST FUND PARTICIPATION AGREEMENT

SEASONS SERIES TRUST FUND PARTICIPATION AGREEMENT

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

FREE Breaking News Alerts from StreetInsider.com!

StreetInsider.com Top Tickers, 6/26/2026

1. ON
2. SYNA
3. SPY
4. MU
5. AAPL

6. VEON
7. DRI
8. NVDA
9. FDXF
10. NKE

Create E-mail Alert Related Categories

SEC Filings

Sign up for StreetInsider Free!

Receive full access to all new and archived articles, unlimited portfolio tracking, e-mail alerts, custom newswires and RSS feeds - and more!

Form 485BPOS VARIABLE SEPARATE ACCOUN

You May Also Be Interested In

Create E-mail Alert Related Categories

Sign up for StreetInsider Free!

Free News Feed